Home

HP LQH-HW 3ULQWHUV User's Manual

1. NetWare Workstation NetWare 4 1 File ag oil NetWare 4 1 NetWare File Server Workstation NetWare ar _ Workstation Bridge Router NetWare Workstation Figure 16 Novell Integration Preferred File Server NDS amp Bindery Preferred File Server NDS amp Bindery In a bindery setup the preferred file server specifies the file server that the print server object was created on In an NDS setup it specifies a file server that the print server object resides on Since NDS is distributed most administrators will not know which file server s the print server object is actually stored on so in most NDS environments this option is not used This feature is useful in a large Novell network so that the LineJet Print Server does not ignore important file servers If you are setting up the LineJet Print Server to work with a Bindery file server it is a good idea to set a preferred server on the LineJet Print Server To view those file servers that the LineJet Print Server does acknowledge at a given time use the debug nest fserver command See Chapter 12 Commands for more information Adding Preferred File Server HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http LineJet IPaddress networkC
2. 0ccccece 62 Configuration Alternatives c cccccccccsceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseceeessaeeeeees 64 4 The Configuration Menus eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 67 DLI A APEE EET dee a cithal A E 67 Configuration Main Menu ss sssssessssssssssressirssirsssrnssrnsrnrsrnnsennsrnnsrne 68 Config Control Menu eaea aet aaia aae a aea aeaaea a aaa ee as 71 Active Emulation Menu sessssssessrrnessssrnesnnnnesrnnnnesrnnnnnnnnennenennnnnnnnnnnne 73 Emulation Menses iaia ir Ei a i a 74 POLI EMUAION ess aaa a r raaa a Aaaa Aa Aaa A 75 LP Plus E mulation ia a cea eae eee ess 80 P Series Emulation cccccccccceesseeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeceaeesseneeessaeeseeaeees 84 Proprinter XL Emulation eee cceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaes 87 Epson FA EMUlaton riii a A Piedestivingeaeedicaees 89 Serial Matrix Emulation 0 0 cecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeens 92 P Series XQ Emulation cccccesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeetsaeeeeeaeees 95 IGP PGL Emulation iaaa aoa eins 97 IGP VGL Code V Emulation 0cccccececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeneeees 102 Maint Misc Me nis ruere E EEEN TA 109 Host Interface MenUicsurisareririiireai di i e 110 Bi TronicS SUDMENU 2 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeceaaeseeneeeseaeesteneeeeaes 111 Centronics Parallel Submenu eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeees 112 Serial Subm ANU a ea aes ea ae 114 Ethernet Submenu c cceeeecece
3. Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and go to the Frame Type field to select the appropriate frame type 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re power the printer to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print Server s IP address followed by a colon then root ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell frametype ethernet2 802 3 1802 2 802 2snap autosense 4 Reset the unit to make the changes take effect reset Changing The Print Server Mode NDS amp Bindery The LineJet Print Server allows the user to store a particular mode for the unit to operate in This will be either NDS Bindery or autosense If autosense is used the LineJet Print Server will first attempt to log in to a NDS file server and if it fails it will try to log in to a Bindery file server Note If you are using both NDS and Bindery file servers in your setup make sure the mode is set to auto HTML Me
4. A configuration consists of a group of parameters such as line spacing forms length etc Your printer contains the following configurations e The factory default configuration It can be loaded but cannot be altered All of the parameters and their values are listed on page 44 e Eight configurations that you can customize for unique print job requirements Creating customized configurations is explained on page 48 Locking And Unlocking The ENTER Key To make configuration changes you must unlock the ENTER key With the printer offline raise the printer cover and press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously The LCD will show this message for about a second ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED When you lock the ENTER key your configuration settings are fixed and cannot be altered Locking secures your settings With the printer offline raise the printer cover and press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously to lock the ENTER key The LCD will briefly show this message ENTER SWITCH LOCKED Changing And Saving Parameter Settings Changing And Saving Parameter Settings You can change a parameter setting such as line spacing or forms length by pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation control codes in the host data stream When you change a parameter it is active as long as the printer is on This is true whether you used the control panel or sent a control code from the host If y
5. Factory Default Printer Protocol from page 80 Serial Matrix Control Code Define CR Auto LF Overstrike Define LF Printer 06 Code Code Select 8 0 LPI CR CR Enable Enable LF LF Disable 10 3 LPI CR CR LF Disable Disable LF CR LF_ Enable 6 0 LPI Alt Set Character Escd 80 9F Set command Control Code Printable see page 94 Even dot plot Double high Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 8 or 10 3 LPI Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer e CR CR Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Auto LF The Auto LF option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data pas
6. Try doing a debug nest ipx telnet command on the LineJet Print Server or find the IPX Layer section on the Novell HTML status page Check that a board has been bound to the LineJet Print Server and that the network number is correct for your network If not you may want to set a specific frame type for the LineJet Print Server to use You can find out what frame type is bound to which board number using the debug nest odi command or from the ODI Layer section on the Novell HTML status page Try a debug nest fserver telnet command or find the File Servers section on the Novell HTML status page If no file servers show up then there is probably a problem with the network connection or the LineJet Print Server card is not on a Novell network Try a debug nest sap telnet command or find the SAP section on the Novell HTML status page to see if the LineJet Print Server card is seeing any network activity Try a debug nest pserver telnet command or find the PSERVER section on the Novell HTML status page Look for a valid queue under the EPS QUEUES section If the printer field contains a number and there is a valid file server but no queue then you probably made an error in the setup and should try again If it is an NDS PSERVER setup look for a line with the following type of message Could not login to NDS Tree lt TREE gt as lt PSERVER lt CONTEXT gt This means that either the tree is wron
7. Whenever it is necessary to service the printer remember these important maintenance concepts e Use only the ribbons specified in Appendix A Use of incorrect ribbons can cause ink migration problems degraded print quality and expensive damage to the printer e Incorrect closure of the forms thickness lever can cause smearing degraded print quality paper jams and damage to the platen and shuttle assembly Never close the forms thickness lever too tightly e Excessive printing outside of the boundaries of the paper will degrade print quality and cause hammer bank damage Never print outside of the paper width Standard Features All of the printers offer a wide range of horizontal and vertical dot densities operate quietly and can load an emulation very easily Other features are specified in the following sections Host Computer Interfaces The following host computer interface choices are available e Bi Tronics e RS 232 serial interface e RS 422 serial interface e Centronics e Ethernet optional on C3201D and C3202D only Printer Emulations The following printer emulations or protocols are selectable at the control panel e HP PCL II the default e LP Plus which consists of Printronix P Series Epson FX 1050 IBM Proprinter III XL e QMS optional e PGL optional Each emulation provides a different set of configuration menus control codes and character sets 23 Chapter_ 1 _
8. stop print scheduler use lpadmin to describe print queue often referred to as the logical Unix printer of the same name start the print scheduler enable the print queue accept the print queue allow it to accept print jobs do a test print Several examples are shown below Example 1 Using the dest d1prn Sun 2 5 x lpshut lpsystem t bsd lobby lpadmn p lobby v dev null gives file locking lpadmin p lobby i usr 1lib 1p model netstandard lpadmin p lobby sLJ_PS1 dlprn lpsched enable lobby accept lobby 175 Chapter 9 _ Unix Host Configuration Example 2 Using the dest d1prn Sun 2 6 2 7 and Similar lpshut lpadmn p lobby v dev null gives file locking lpadmin p lobby i usr 1ib 1p model netstandard o protocol bsd lpadmin p lobby sLJ_PS1 dlprn lpsched enable lobby accept lobby Example 3 Using the raw tcp socket 9100 Sun 2 1 2 7 and Similar lpshut lpadmn p lobby v dev null gives file locking lpadmin p lobby i usr 1ib 1lp model netstandard lpadmin p lobby o dest LJ_PS1 9100 o protocol tcp lpsched enable lobby accept lobby To do a test print for either form using the etc hosts file lp d lobby etc hosts 176 LPR LPD Printing Setup On BSD Systems Sun 4 x LPR LPD Printing Setup On BSD Systems Sun 4 x DEC Ultrix Free BSD etc The LineJet Print Server also supports Unix operating systems which follow a BSD print system e g SunOS 4 1 x
9. All other names will be ignored by the device Is the LineJet Print Server in Bindery mode as seen under the list pserver output on the device If servicing only a NetWare 3 x file server it must be set to handle Bindery services The default setting is Bindery Is there an available NetWare user license for the LineJet Print Server to use while it acts as a PSERVER Every PSERVER takes up one user license since it logs in to the Novell file server Have you given the connection process some time after repowering the LineJet Print Server In larger Novell environments the file server identification and connection process can take several minutes 193 Chapter 10 Novell Troubleshooting Tips 194 NetWare 4 x No PSERVER Connection Has the LineJet Print Server been power cycled once the PCONSOLE steps were completed This will make the print server boot up and realize which print queue and file server it needs to service Is the LineJet Print Server already servicing a queue on another file server If so it can not service another file server at the same time When defining a new print server within PCONSOLE did you use the correct name for the LineJet Print Server e g M_071C1A By default it only recognizes itself as M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of its Ethernet address found on the configuration printout When defining a new printer name within PCONSOLE did you use a pre defined destinati
10. Chapter 4 Emulation Menu P Series Emulation Printer Protocol from page 80 P Series Factory Default Control Code Control Code Define CR Auto LF Overstrike Define LF 06 08 Code Code 8 0 LPI Elongated CR CR Disable Enable LF CR LF 10 3 LPI Backspace CR CR LF_ Enable Disable LF LF 6 0 LPI Select SFCC EVFU Select Alt Set 80 9F Character SFCC d Set Command 1 Enable Control Code see below Even dot plot 0 7F hex Disable Printable Double high Character Set from above IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult OCR A OCR B Primary Subset ASCII USA Primary Subset ASCII USA ASCII USA EBCDIC ASCII USA French French German German German Swedish English English Danish Norw Danish Latin 2 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 Danish Norwegian Swedish 8859 15 Swedish Finnish Italian Italian English Spanish Spanish Dutch Japanese Japanese French French Canadian French Canadian Spanish Dutch Latin American Italian Finnish Polish POL1 DEC 256 ELOT 928 Greek 3 Danish II Turkish Swiss Greek Greek Spanish II Japanese
11. 249 configuration 250 data carrier detect DCD 249 data set ready DSR 249 error handling 250 framing error handling 250 overrun error handling 250 parity error handling 250 pin assignments 248 protocol 249 request to send RTS 249 X ON X OFF signal 249 RS 232 serial interface signals 249 data terminal ready DTR 249 received data RD 249 transmitted data TD 249 RS 422 serial interface configuration 250 error handling 250 framing error handling 250 overrun error handling 250 parity error handling 250 pin assignments 248 protocol 249 X ON X OFF signal 249 RS 422 serial interface signals 249 received data RD 249 transmitted data TD 249 Run Mode 29 Running self tests 255 S Save Configuration parameter 72 Saving a configuration 50 Saving parameters 43 50 Secondary Character Set 77 Security LineJet Print Server 235 SECURITY CODE VIOLATION message 265 Select Font 99 Select LPI 99 Select SFCC 85 98 Selecting power stacker 109 power up configuration 56 Selecting language for LCD 109 Self tests 29 255 running 255 test width 125 SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR 265 Serial interface 114 RS 232 248 Serial interface menu Buffer Size in K 116 Data Terminal Ready 116 Request to Send 116 Serial Matrix Character Set Menu 94 Serial Matrix Emulation 92 Service routine 251 Set Commands 223 Setting a Password 235 SFCC 103 SFCC amp Pwrup 103 SFCC d Command
12. Load Config The printer can store up to eight unique configurations in memory This parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration Configuration 0 is the factory default and its parameters cannot be changed It is always available for loading See page 54 for a detailed description and sample procedure 71 Chapter 4 Config Control Menu Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet different print job requirements which eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job The configurations are stored in memory They will not be lost if you turn off the printer Configuration 0 is a factory preset configuration which cannot be changed or saved See page 50 for a detailed description and sample procedure Note If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted 72 Print Config Allows you to print a listing of stored printer configurations It is recommended you store the configurations in a safe place for quick referral such as inside the printer if you have a cabinet model See page 52 for a detailed description and sample procedure Delete Config Allows you to delete one or all of your eight customized configurations Configuration 0 is a factory preset configuration and cannot be changed or deleted Power Up Config Allows you to s
13. Watch the LEDs in the rear of the printer as they cycle through the power on self test When the test is complete the STAT led will flash Network Connector Figure 7 Physical Setup Configuration Setup There are two parts to a LineJet Print Server setup 1 Configuring the LineJet Print Server card so it can be seen on the network This involves network related settings e g an IP address within TCP IP environments configured through the built in command shell npsh or from the control panel 61 Chapter 3 _ Configuring The Print Server 2 Configuring a host with a new printer so it knows how to send data to the LineJet Print Server Just being able to see the printer on the network does not mean you can automatically print to it A host has to be told where to send the data Note Some network environments do not require any network settings to be configured on the LineJet Print Server card However all network setups K require configuration on the host end Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel The LineJet Print Server settings can be set from the printer control panel The procedure is described below Note When the printer is first powered on the messages Waiting for the y Ethernet Adapter and Ethernet Detected will display on the LCD After several other boot messages appear the LCD will display the message E NET INIT This initialization process will take a
14. http LineJetIPaddress adminConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 adminConf htm1 Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and u press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the System Information section and enter the new name into the Name field 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re power the printer to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and u press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print Server s IP address followed by a colon then root ipaddress root gt 3 Atthe prompt enter store pserver name name 4 Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect reset Changing The Frame Type NDS amp Bindery The LineJet Print Server allows the user to store a particular frame type for the unit to adhere to in a Novell environment HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 202 Changing The Print Server Mode NDS amp Bindery 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http LineJet IPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1
15. password no password is default welcome root user gt ignore warning messages about differences store TCP IP 1 addr from current save the arp assigned value list TCP IP you will see your IP address and a subnet address If the subnet address is incorrect use the following command to modify it store TCP IP 1 mask 255 255 255 0 enter your mask value in place of this one If you have a gateway value enter it now using the following commands store TCP IP add default router gateway_value 1 reset after a minute or so you should be able to ping the print server 136 Using BOOTP Web Browser Initiate the Web browser and enter the IP Address or hosts table name in the URL line Click on Configuration Log in as root no password Enter the values you need for subnet mask and gateway and click Submit Delete the static arp entry at a DOS prompt type the command arp d 192 168 20 20 with your own IP Address value in place of this one Then click on System Administration and Reset Adapter to store the values Note Windows 95 98 pre winsoc2 TCP IP has a bug in which an arp entry will not be created unless a valid arp entry exists in the arp table on the client you are using To ensure you have a valid arp entry ping your own workstation in the DOS window and type the command arp a to view the arp table before using the arp s command Using BOOTP BOOTP allows you to assign an IP addre
16. 13 6 inches 345 4 mm 136 characters 0 columns 0 columns 0 lines Disable Disable Online English Enable XXX XXX KKK KKK XXK XKK KKK KKK XXK XKX XKX KKK hhhhhhhhhhhh Disable Disable Ethernet 802 2 3001 100 seconds Auto Select Disable Enable Disable 15 min Shift Recycle Full Width 40 dots x Megabytes Xx Hrs XxX CHS x x x Disable 60 yards 0 New Ribbon 47 Chapter 3 Changing Parameters Changing Parameters A configuration consists of several parameters The factory configuration is PCL II emulation using the Bi Tronics interface You can keep this configuration to print your jobs or if your print job requires a different setting such as a Serial interface follow the procedure outlined in Table 5 Example The example below describes how to change the Unidirectional parameter from disable to enable Use this example as a basic guideline to move throughout the configuration menu and change other parameters Figure 6 on page 41 shows the top level of the configuration menu The submenus are shown in Chapter 4 If the configuration has already been changed and you do not know what the current configuration is print a copy page 52 Then decide if you must change any parameters Factory Default OFFLINE CONFIG has PRINTER CONTROL CONTROL Unidirectional PMD Fault Slow Paper Power Saver Slew Tim
17. 25 Emulations optional 74 Energy star office equipment program 122 ENTER key locking 42 unlocking 42 Environment Description Windows 149 Environmental characteristics 269 Epson FX 1050 Emulation 89 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID 261 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX 261 ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID 261 ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX 261 ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED 261 Error handling 106 RS 232 serial interface 250 RS 422 serial interface 250 Error log clearing 124 printing 124 Error markers 106 Error messages 259 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED 261 ERROR NVRAM FAILURE 261 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM 261 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH 261 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE 261 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID 261 Error Reporting GP PGL 101 ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED 261 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX 261 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH 261 262 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM 262 ESC d Command 93 ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED message 262 ETHERNET DETECTED message 262 ETHERNET PARAMETERS Menu 120 Ethernet Submenu 117 EXHAUST FAN FLT message 262 Extended Execute Copy 100 295 F PLAT INV CMD 264 PLAT INV PARM 264 Factory default parameters 44 PLAT INV STATE 264 Fault Action 127 POWER SAVER MODE 264 Fault messages 259 POWERSUPPLY HOT 264 15V PWR FAIL 260 23 5V PWR FAIL 260 48V PWR FAIL 260 8 5V PWR FAIL 260 A TO D OVERUN 260 ACCESS NULL PTR 260 BUFFER OVERRUN 260 CLEAR PAPER JAM 2
18. Address to be changed 9 Press the DOWN arrow key 10 Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to select the desired value 11 Press the ENTER key to make the selection An asterisk appears to the right of the value 12 Press the UP arrow key and you will be returned to step 8 When you are finished changing parameters exit the configuration menus and lock the ENTER key For instructions refer to Locking And Unlocking The ENTER Key on page 42 Caution When a change is made from the control panel the LineJet Print Server is re initialized The messages E NET RESET and E NET INIT display on the control panel This process takes several minutes Make sure not to shut the printer off or make further changes to the LineJet Print Server settings during this initialization period to prevent a loss of LineJet Print Server configuration information When the initialization is complete the message E NET READY will display 63 Chapter 3 _ Configuring The Print Server Configuration Alternatives Besides the HTML forms and software provided the LineJet Print Server internal command shell nosh can also be reached using the following methods The Print Server Manager Utility The Print Server printer manager utility is a versatile and dynamic program It allows you to remotely organize all the printers in your office in a single database download software and printer settings from a host computer with
19. For example if your printer is attached to one host with a Centronics connection and a second host with an RS 422 serial connection you would select Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu and RS 422 under the Serial Hotport menu Auto Switching Submenu Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast Timeout This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and check the other selected Port Types for data to print When the printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time it needs to Timeout in order to service the other ports Report Status e
20. ITC Korinna ITC Lubalin Graph ITC Souvenir ITC Tiepolo ITC Zapf Chancery and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation Albertus Gill Sans and Times New Roman are registered trademarks and Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc registered in the U S Pat and TM office and elsewhere Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography Inc This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct or indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice COPYRIGHT 2000 HEWLETT PACKARD CO Table of Contents WAL OGIICHO MY jerisi ce secende tere EEE atta 19 About This Manualscsiesi sic ites acictits an alee ees 19
21. If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations then the currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset command is received e Factory Config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is received 79 Chapter 4 EMULATION from page 74 Emulation Menu LP Plus Emulation LP PLUS Printer Print Char CPI LPI Font Page Reset Cmd Protocol Set Select Attributes Format CFG Ld Select CPI Typeface Disable 10 0 CPI Data Processing Power up config 12 0 CPI NLQ Current config 15 0 CPI OCR A Factory config 17 1 CPI OCR B 20 0 CPI High Speed Select LPI NLQ Sans Serif 6 0 LPI Prop Spacing z 8 0 LPI Disable Form Length Form Width Margins ee 10 3 LPI Enable p Bold Print Abs LengthIN Abs Width IN Left Margin Disable Disable 11 0 inches 13 6 inches 0 columns 1 2 inch Enable 0 1 24 0 1 13 6 0 369 2 3 inch italic Erint Abs Length MM Abs WidthMM Right Margin 5 6 inch Disable 279 4 mm 345 4 mm 0 columns 1 inch Forward Slant 0 1 609 6 0 1 345 4 0 369 Backward Slant Funct of Lines Function of CPI Bottom Margin Slashed Zerg 66 lines 136 characters 0 lines Disable 1 192 1 272 0 451 Enable P Series Proprinter XL Epson FX Serial Matrix P Series XQ see page 84 seepage 87 seepage89
22. LineJet Print Server configuration 171 routers 171 using BOOTP 137 Unlocking the ENTER key 42 UP DRV SHORT message 266 UPC Descenders 100 105 Upper Case Select 96 URL home page 65 Users 235 Using ARP Windows 135 Using BOOTP Unix 137 302 Using Page Level Recovery on LineJet Printers 146 V Vertical formatting features electronic vertical formatting 24 EVFU for Epson mode 24 vertical tabbing Proprinter and Epson 24 VFU Select 86 96 W WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER message 266 Wattage printer 270 Windows communicating 151 environment description 149 LineJet Print Server configuration 150 mandatory configuration 150 NT 3 51configuration 153 154 optional configuration 150 routers 151 TCP IP access problem 165 using ARP 135 Windows 95 160 configuration 160 Windows 3 1 host setup 161 Windows NT 153 X X ON X OFF signal RS 232 serial interface 249 RS 422 serial interface 249 invent Copyright 2000 Hewlett Packard Company 172720 001A
23. Print Config 6 Print Config NV Current 7 N Print Config Press until the desired option All displays 8 ENTER OFFLINE ean listing begins CONFIG CONTROL punang 9 Carefully tear off the configuration printout 10 A 7 g ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key LOCKED 11 ON LINE ONLINE 12 Close the printer cover Store the printout in a safe place The printer is ready for operation 53 Chapter 3 _ Changing Parameters Loading Configuration Values CONFIG CONTROL Factory Default Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config Power Up Config Protect Configs oNOoONAUON O0O You can load any of the eight customized configurations or the factory default configuration Configuration 0 Its list of parameters begins on page 44 The loaded configuration remains active as long as the printer is on If you power off the printer the power up configuration will load when power is turned back on Any of the eight customized configurations can be designated as the power up configuration The procedure in Table 9 explains how to select the power up configuration If you do not set a power up configuration the factory default configuration will load if you power the printer off and then power it back on Note A configuration must be saved first in order to load it 54 Loading Configuration Values Table 8
24. Slow Paper Slew Power Saver Time DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests Test Width Paper Out Dots System Memory Print Statistics On Print Print Strokes Print Lines 11 inch Pages RIBBONMINDER New Ribbon Ribbon Action Ribbon Size Ribbon Adjust Fault Action Factory Default Configuration Values Data Processing Disable Disable Disable Disable 11 0 inches 279 4 mm 66 lines 13 6 inches 345 4 mm 136 characters 0 columns 0 columns 0 lines Disable Disable Online English Enable Disable Reset 1 Disable Enable Disable 15 min Shift Recycle Full Width 40 dots x Megabytes Xa XHES X X Hrs x x x Disable 60 yards 0 New Ribbon 45 Chapter 3 46 Configuring The Printer Print Server Ethernet Interface ACTIV EMULATION PCL II Primary Char set ID Symbol Set Pitch Density Second Char set ID Symbol Set Pitch Density Page Length Rep Max Line Width Face CPI Delay Graphics Density Perforation Skip Display Functns Line Terminator LF After CR CR After LF CR after FF CR After VT PTX Linefeed LPI Adjust Page L Lines Page L Inches Config Print Symbol Set Print Reset Cmd CFG Ld LP PLUS Printer Protocol P Series Control Code 06 Control Code 08 Define CR Code Auto LF Overstrike Define LF code Select SFCC EVFU Select Alt Set 80 9F Character Set IBM PC Primary Subset Extended Subset SFCC d command CPI LPI Select Select CPI Select LPI F
25. This License shall continue until terminated This license may be terminated by agreement between you and Hewlett Packard or by Hewlett Packard If you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected within thirty 30 days after notice When this License is terminated you shall return to the place you obtained them the printer and all copies of the Software and documentation U S Government Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 242 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 Acknowledgment of Terms and Conditions YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY BY USING THIS PRINTER YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT Hewlett Packard makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fit
26. as most queueing mechanisms need to know the static location IP address of a printer and with each DHCP power on cycle will likely change 133 Chapter 6 _ TCP IP LineJet Print Server Configuration Assign TCP IP Values Method 1 Using the Printer Control Panel All of the basic TCP IP values can easily be set and stored in the LineJet Print Server via the printer front panel under the ETHERNET PARAMS menu Refer to Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel on page 62 for detailed instructions Set the IP Address Subnet Mask or Gateway Values then press the ON LINE key to store those values in the LineJet Print Server These steps do not require the printer to be connected to your network After setting the TCP IP values connect the printer to the designated hub or switch port via UTP cable With the LineJet printer powered on use a ping to the assigned IP Address for the LineJet Print Server e Windows 95 98 NT OS 2 Open a DOS shell or OS 2 window and type ping xxx xxx xxx xxx using the IP value you assigned above e AS 400 At a command prompt type ping xxx xxx xxx xxx IP address must be in single quotes e Unix At a terminal session command prompt type Ping XXX XXX XXX XXX Note If you made a hosts table alias name entry or set up DNS you can ping the l alias instead of having to remember the actual IP Address Similarly the K alias can be substituted for the URL in telnet sessions
27. guidelines and a checklist to use for designing forms that will run smoothly through the print station of the LP Series or LineJet printer 275 Appendix B _ General Paper Specifications General Paper Specifications This section describes the minimum paper specifications that must be met to ensure the best printer performance Always test paper and forms before buying large quantities Make all measurements at 20 to 26 Celsius 68 to 78 Fahrenheit and 45 to 55 relative humidity LP Series and LineJet printers perform well with forms that meet the specifications listed in Table 22 and Table 23 below Note Hewlett Packard conforms to ANSI Standard X3 96 1983 American National Forms Information Systems for Continuous Business Forms and ISO Recommendation No 2784 which cover common form widths and depths standards for sprocket feed holes and margins and other basic tolerances 276 Table 22 Paper Sizes Maximum form width 17 0 inches 43 18 cm edge to edge Minimum form width 3 0 inches 7 62 cm edge to edge Maximum Printing Width 13 6 inches 34 54 cm Maximum Right Margin 1 to 13 6 inches 2 54 to 34 54 cm Maximum Left Margin 0 to 13 5 inches 0 to 34 29 cm Maximum Form Length 16 inches 40 64 cm Minimum Form Length 2 inches 5 08 cm Table 23 Paper Weights Single Part Forms Standard 15 to 100 pound 57 to 380 gm meter Bes
28. selected emulation will be erased unless they have been saved If you do not save your configuration before you turn off the printer all of the new parameters will be erased When you turn the printer on again the power up configuration will load If no configurations have been designated as the power up configuration the factory configuration will load If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted See page 60 for details Saving Your New Configuration Table 6 Saving Configurations Step Key Result Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on Raise the printer cover on cabinet models 2 ON LINE OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 3 a p g ENTER SWITCH fas you to make configuration UNLOCKED cnanggs OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 4 CONFIG CONTROL N Load Config S PS om CONFIG CONTROL Save Config 6 Save Config NY 1 7 Press until the desired number Save Config 4 QR gt 2 9 1 8 displays NOTE Do not turn off the printer while save is in progress because you might lose your configuration 8 ENTER The configuration is now saved in Save Config 2 memory In this case config 2 9 CONFIG CONTROL a UNTIL Save Config NOTE It is recommended you print the configuration see page 53 for the proced
29. to network 61 Control Code 06 85 92 95 Control Code 08 85 Control codes control panel changes 43 overview description 25 Control panel 39 Control Panel Configuration gateway address 62 IP Address 62 subnet mask 62 Controls and indicators printing conventions 19 Convert to U C 106 CPI LPI Select 81 CR Edit 98 CTL VOLT FAIL message 260 D Data Bit 8 107 Data Bit 8 parameter Centronics 112 Data Bits parameter 115 Data carrier detect DCD signal RS 232 serial interface 249 Data lines 1 through 8 signal 242 Data Polarity parameter Centronics 113 Data protocol 114 115 Data set ready DSR signal RS 232 serial interface 249 Data strobe signal 243 Data Terminal Ready DTR signal RS 232 serial interface 249 Data Terminal Ready parameter 116 Dataproducts PI ignored 112 Debug Commands 231 Default configuration parameters 44 Define CR Code 85 87 90 92 95 Define LF Code 85 88 90 93 95 Define LF Code Line Feed 98 Delete Configuration parameter 72 Deleting configurations 58 Diagnostic capabilities 24 menu 123 tests 255 tools 24 Diagnostics 29 DIAGNOSTICS PASSED 260 Direction printing 121 Display Language parameter 109 Displaying Functions 78 Documents related to this manual 20 Dot matrix character formation 26 DRVR CIR BAD message 260 E E s plus TOF test 124 Electrical characteristics 270 Elong Alt Font 96 Emulation menu 74 Emulations 23
30. to save the I O configuration io gt exit to exit the I O configurator 139 Chapter 7 __ HP e3000 MPE XL MPE iX Host Configuration g atthe SYSGEN prompt enter the commands SYSGEN gt keep SYSGEN gt exit h to have the new configuration take effect reboot the system with the command start norecovery It is also possible to configure the device online by using the command ioconfig 2 Identify the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway value to be used for each LineJet Print Server These values are necessary for any network printing Often only the IP address value will vary from printer to printer You can assign these values to the LineJet Print Server by entering the values in the printer control panel see page 62 or by using the bootpd process as described in Configuring and Managing MPE iX Internet Services lf you use bootpd create an entry in the bootpd configuration file for each LineJet Print Server you are adding For example printerl ht ether ha 00807209yyyy p XXX XXX XXX xxx SM XXX XXX XXX XKXKX gt GWHXXX XXX XXX XXX Note Be sure to replace the xxx fields with the correct IP Address Subnet u mask and Gateway mask values you are using In this example the ha value is the MAC address of the LineJet Print Server being added Replace yyyy with the last four digits of the MAC address for the individual print server If the LineJet Print Server is pre installed the MAC
31. 168 11 9 networkNovellStatus htm1 214 e Have you tried repowering the printer Wait about a minute before checking to see if it has logged in and attached to a queue e Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit e Is the LineJet Print Server already servicing a queue on another file server If so it cannot service another file server at the same time RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup Is there an entry when alist rprinter telnet command is done on the LineJet Print Server not found on the Novell HTML status page When the LineJet Print Server is configured as an RPRINTER this command should produce the appropriate entry If the LineJet Print Server has logged in to the file server but has not attached to the queue there may be a permission problem Make sure the appropriate users have rights to this queue they should be in the group everyone Also you may have to assign the queue to root so it is available to everyone Does the destination you used in your RPRINTER setup have the Novell service enabled Please see Chapter 12 Commands for information on enabling disabling services Try doing a debug nest ipx telnet command on the LineJet Print Server or find the IPX Layer section on the Novell HTML status page Check that a board has been bound to the LineJet Print Server and that the network number is correct for your network If not you may want to set a specific frame type for the LineJet Print S
32. 21 Return 28 DATA LINE 3 4 FAULT 32 Spares 14 Return 22 Return 29 DATA LINE 4 5 PAPER EMPTY 12 No Connection 34 35 Return 23 Return 28 36 DATA LINE 5 6 BUSY 11 5 Volts 18 Return 24 Return 29 DATA LINE 6 7 Return 25 DATA LINE 7 8 Return 26 DATA LINE 8 9 Return 27 DATA STROBE 1 Return 19 PAPER INSTRUCTION 15 Return 29 PRIME 31 Return 30 Centronics Interface Signals The Centronics interface signals between the host computer and the printer are defined as follows Data Lines 1 through 8 Provide eight standard or inverted levels from the host that specify a character or function code Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set You may enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics submenu 242 Centronics Parallel Interface Configuration Data Strobe Carries a low true 100 ns min pulse from the host that clocks data into the printer Paper Instruction Pl Carries a VFU control signal from the host with the same timing as the data lines Acknowledge A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer Online A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for data transfer and the ON LINE key on the operator panel has been activated When the printer is in online mode it may accept data from the host Paper Empty PE A high true level from the
33. 39 OVES Wde ai a a a eke aiea 39 Configuring The Printer seessesseessssrrsssrnssrrrsnrsrrnnsrnrsrnnnsrnesrnneern 39 Operating MOdeS cc ccccceceseneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeseeneeeseeeeeaeeeee 42 The Configurations ccsscisiecetiss arain ete ivtetee ae a Eaa ara aea 42 Locking And Unlocking The ENTER Key esseere 42 Changing And Saving Parameter SettingS ceceeeeeeeeeees 43 Factory Default Configuration ValUeS cccccceceeeeeereesteeeeeeees 44 Table of Contents Changing Parameters ccccccccseeceeeeeeceneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeneeees 48 Example ar eaa a eh Aoi a alee initia 48 Saving Your New Configuration c cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 Printing The Current Configuration c cccccseesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 52 Loading Configuration Values cccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeteeeeaeeeeaes 54 The Power Up Configuration ccccccesceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeee 56 Deleting Configurations c cccccceceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeteneeeseeeeeeneees 58 Protecting Your Configurations cccccseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeseeeeenees 60 Configuring The Print Server ecccceceeeeceseeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 61 Connecting To The Network c cccceeeeseceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeseaeeeeaes 61 Configuration Set cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeesecaeeteaeeeeee 61 Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel
34. 47 48 49 4A 4B LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZE 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51i 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 SA SB i _ abcdefghijk 5C 5D SE SF 460 61 62 63 64 65 6 amp 47 68 69 6A 4B Imnoparstuvwxyzt C 6D 6E 46F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 1J U SyR Clee 7C 7D 7E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C Figure 20 Hex Dump Sample A hex code printout or hex dump is a translation of all host interface data to its hexadecimal or symbolic equivalent A hex dump lists all ASCII character data received from the host computer with their corresponding two digit hexadecimal codes Hex dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data reception problems Printable characters print as the assigned symbol nonprintable characters are indicated by a period See Appendix C for hex to ASCII conversion Table 20 shows the procedure for printing a hex dump 257 Chapter 15 Diagnosing Problems Table 20 Printing a Hex Dump Step Key Result Notes k 2 ON LINE 3 AG 4 E UNTIL 5 z 7 SY 8 4 OR 9 ENTER 16 mae Make sure the printer is on Raise the printer cover OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL OFFLINE MAINT MISC MAINT MISC Hex Dump Mode Hex Dump Mode Disable Hex Dump Mode Enable Hex Dump Mode Enable ENTER SWITCH ASCII ch
35. 7 Select Properties from this menu to display the current settings for this printer Click on the Details tab to display the printer port settings Click on the ADD PORT button 10 At the Add Port dialogue box that displays click on the button labeled Other 11 Click on TCP IP Printer Port within the Other list 12 At the next dialogue box that displays fill in the host name or IP address of the LineJet Print Server in the first field 13 Fillin a valid TCP port number on the LineJet Print Server in the second field The choice is 4400 or 9100 for PRN 14 Click OK when done to return to the Details window You should now see something relating to PPS Port within the Print to the following port field 15 Click OK to close this printer properties window You now have a new network printer which relies on PPS to print remotely to a printer off of the LineJet Print Server Windows 3 1 Host Setup If you are running Windows 3 1 stations on your network you will need to rely on either TCP IP or IPX to print to the LineJet Print Server If IPX is used you will have a print queue defined on a Novell file server to which your Windows 3 1 stations will send their print jobs The LineJet Print Server will then service this print queue as either a PSERVER or an RPRINTER Please see Chapter 10 Novell Configuration for additional details If you want to rely on TCP IP you wi
36. 86 Shell commands 219 Shift recycle test 123 SHUTL INV CMD message 265 SHUTL INV PARM message 265 Shuttle fast test 124 SHUTTLE JAM message 265 Shuttle only test 124 Shuttle slow test 124 Signals Bi Tronics interface 245 Centronics parallel interface 242 RS 232 serial interface 249 RS 422 serial interface 249 Skip Command Prefix 99 Slash 0 104 Sleep mode setting duration of 122 Slew Relative 96 Slewing paper speed 122 Slow paper slew parameter 122 SNMP 290 SOFTWARE ERROR message 265 Specifications electrical 270 environmental 269 interfaces 271 STACK OVERFLOW message 265 STACK UNDERFLOW message 266 Standard printer features 23 Statistics printer viewing 125 Stop Bits parameter 116 Store Commands 220 Subnet Mask control panel configuration 62 Symbol Set Printout 79 System Memory parameter 125 T TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN 266 TCB CORRUPTED message 266 TCP Access Lists 237 TCP IP Access Problem Windows 165 Test Width parameter 125 Testing the printer 255 301 Timeout 119 TOF action at prime signal parameter 111 113 Transmitted data TD signal RS 232 serial interface 249 RS 422 serial interface 249 Trickle Time 119 Troubleshooting diagnostic tools 24 Novell 4 x 194 Truncate Alpha 105 U UNDEF INTERRUPT message 266 UNDFNED OPCODE message 266 Unidirectional parameter 121 Unix communicating 171 environments 170 host configuration 172
37. Active 247 Chapter 14 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces Note The RS 232 and RS 422 serial interface circuit characteristics are l compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications K EIA 232 E and ElA 422 B The RS 232 and RS 422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit serial devices that are compatible with an RS 232 controller The input serial data transfer rate in baud is selectable from the printer operator panel Baud rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 and 38 400 are available for RS 232 and RS 422 The input format consists of a single start bit 7 or 8 data bits and one or two stop bits The number of data bits is determined by printer configuration The data bits are interpreted with the least significant bit first Parity checking is determined by printer configuration options selected from the operator panel The printer interface uses a first in first out buffer The asynchronous interface accepts data as it is provided by the host The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 50 feet 15 meters for RS 232 or 4000 feet 1220 meters for RS 422 A copper conductor twisted pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of 16 pF foot 52 5 pF meter terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be used for the RS 422 Table 17 RS 232 Serial Interface Connector Pin A
38. Adjusting Paper Position ccccesceeeeetteeeeeeeeeteeeeeteees 145 Methodial 2 acteit Aa tedden nek See Seri eee 145 MetnOG Aera cc antares x tasimeetaveae decd re tideeda gat encased dead enadbetaetilk 145 Using Page Level Recovery On LineJet Printers 146 HP e3000 MPE XL MPE iX DTC Configuration 148 MPE XL MPE iX Typical Configuration ccceseeeeeees 148 8 Windows Configuration 149 OVEIVICW 2 cian E A Maisie i eas ane eevee age les 149 Windows Environment Description eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 149 Windows LineJet Print Server Configuration cccceeeeeereees 150 Mandatorycs sntiaavatiedeaulhivi tian shielded eee ea et 150 Optlonialiscst atersta teh tart a Si eta eee ties 150 Communicating Across ROUtElS ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeteneees 151 Changing Workgroup Names cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 151 Changing Destination NAMmeS c cceccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeteeaees 152 Windows Host Configuration c cccceceeseeececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeseeeeees 153 Windows NT 3 51 Host Setup 0 cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeseeeeeeaes 153 Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup 0 ccccececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeteeaees 154 Windows 95 98 Host Setup ccccecsececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 160 Printronix Printing System PPS Host Setup 160 Windows 3 1 Host S tup cccccecceeseeeceeeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeee
39. By default the LineJet Print Server supports two logical user types root Access to everything within the print server including all configurable settings guest Ability to list settings only Using set commands other users can be created Passwords can be set for each user type However most often you would just set a password for the root user to protect the LineJet Print Server configuration Guest users cannot alter the print server configuration in any way You can configure a root password on your LineJet Print Server using either Telnet or a Web browser as follows Telnet Using Telnet set a root password by entering the following commands Syntax set user passwd username password save Example set user passwd root your_password_for_root save Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the user ID u and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 235 Chapter 13 _LineJet Print Server Security Web Browser 1 Using a Web browser direct the browser to URL http LineJetIPaddress adminConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 adminConf htm1 Note i If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the user ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 At the Administration Configuration HTML form that displays scroll down to the Passwords section 3 Click within the Old
40. Configurations Table 10 Deleting Configurations Step Key Result Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on Raise the printer cover on cabinet models 2 ON LINE OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 3 a p g ENTER SWITCH PE you to make configuration UNLOCKED caangss OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 4 CONFIG CONTROL N Load Config S PS om CONFIG CONTROL Delete Config G Delete Config NY 1 7 Delete Conti Press until the desired number 4 OR 3 9 1 8 displays 8 ENTER Deleting Configuration The printer has deleted the selected configuration Delete Config 3 9 a F ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key LOCKED 10 ON LINE ONLINE 11 Close the printer cover The printer is ready for operation 59 Chapter 3 _ Changing Parameters 60 Protecting Your Configurations Factory Default CONFIG CONTROL Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config Power Up Protect Config Configs Disable Enable In order to save or delete a configuration you must set the Protect Configs option to disable Connecting To The Network Configuring The Print Server Connecting To The Network To attach the LineJet Print Server card to a network plug the network cable into the LineJet Print Server connector see Figure 7
41. DNS server needs to be set with this information so that the Unix print daemons software processes can communicate with the physical LineJet Print Server Optional Additional settings like routing entries can be configured allowing for communication across subnets Configuration of the LineJet Print Server can be done from the control panel or through host commands Communicating Across Routers Since Unix environments rely on TCP IP to communicate with the LineJet Print Server attention must be paid to routing After following one of the LineJet Print Server configuration methods mentioned other than the BOOTP method you will most likely only be able to communicate with the print server from the same subnet This means any host across a router will not be able to see your LineJet Print Server In order to communicate across a router it is possible to store a static default router gateway within the print server so that any packets destined for another subnet get forwarded to this router automatically The router or series of routers can then take over ensuring the packets get to their final destination on another subnet on your network To configure a default router gateway within the LineJet Print Server 1 Use the printer front panel to configure the gateway value 2 Load a Web browser on your Unix station on the same subnet and direct it to the URLhttp LineJet IPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 1
42. Disable When a fault occurs on the printer only the active port reports the fault to the host e Enable The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port 119 Chapter 4 Ethernet Params Menu Ethernet Params Menu 120 ETHERNET PARAMS IP Address Gateway Subnet Mask MAC Address Novell NetBIOS Address Protocol Protocol XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX hhhhhhhhhhhh Enable Enable Disable Disable Novell Frame PPM Port PPM Port Ethernet Number Timeout Speed Ethernet 802 2 3001 100 secs Auto Select 802 2 Snap 0 65535 1 255 10 Half Duplex Auto Sensing 10 Full Duplex Ethernet II Ethernet 802 3 Factory Default 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex aif you change the Ethernet speed setting you must also change the switch or hub setting to match The ETHERNET PARAMS menu helps your printer communicate on a network For information on assigning the IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask and MAC Address refer to Methods Of Adjusting Paper Position on page 145 You may also enable or disable the Novell or NetBIOS Protocols within this menu as well as selecting which Novell Frame scheme is used in processing Novell signals See Chapter 10 Novell Configuration for more details If the printer is connected to the LineJet Printer Manager u
43. ERROR Application software tried to Contact your Hewlett Packard Cycle power perform illegal printer function or Customer Service Engineer damaged logic circuits were found on controller board STACK OVERFLOW Fatal firmware error on controller Contact your Hewlett Packard board Customer Service Engineer 265 Chapter 15 Diagnosing Problems Table 21 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table continued Displayed Message Explanation Action Required STACK UNDERFLOW Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer STACKER FAULT Failed motor circuit Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer STACKER FULL Reached full capacity Remove paper stack STACKER JAM Jammed paper or foreign object in unit s travel path Remove paper or foreign object TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN EC software update in progress Download the program again TCB CORRUPTED Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer UNDEF INTERRUPT Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer UNDFNED OPCODE Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer UP DRV SHORT Hammer driver circuits on the boards shorted to gr
44. Loading Configurations Step Key Result Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on Raise the printer cover on cabinet models 2 ON LINE OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 3 a p g ENTER SWITCH fas you to make configuration UNLOCKED cnanggs OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 4 CONFIG CONTROL NZ Load Config 5 Load Config AZ 4 6 7 Press until the desired number C a X nE Conia 1 8 displays 7 ENTER Loading Saved Displays for about a second Configuration Load Config The Printer has loaded the 4 configuration 8 a g ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key LOCKED 9 ON LINE ONLINE 10 Close the printer cover The printer is ready for operation 55 Chapter 3 _ Changing Parameters 56 The Power Up Configuration CONFIG CONTROL Factory Default Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config Power Up Protect Config Configs o 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When you power on the printer for the first time it loads configuration 0 which is the factory default configuration If you save a configuration such as configuration 1 and turn the power off and then back on the printer will load the designated power up configuration not the last saved configuration For your convenience you can specify which configuration 0
45. PTX Linefeed Disabled LPI Adjust This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch lpi values 6 LPI the default or 8 LPI Page L Lines This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 Ipi or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi The default is 66 lines at 6 Ipi Note i If 6 lpi is selected you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 an invalid length However when you press ENTER to select this value the menu will return with the maximum lines for 6 Ipi i e 96 lines Similarly selecting too few lines for 8 Ipi will cause the menu to return with 16 lines 78 PCL II Emulation Page L Inches This parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches in increments of half an inch The default is 11 inches Config Print This option prints the emulation s parameters and the currently selected values Symbol Set Print This option prints a list of all the available sets The character set number prints to the left of the character set sample Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration will be loaded e Disable The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and continues to use the currently loaded configuration e Power Up Config The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is received e Current Config
46. Parallel Port LPT1 is used At the DOS prompt on the computer type filename exe pb lt Return gt Where ilename is a function code file such as 356351 exe pb This command decompresses the file and copies it as a binary file into the printer s flash memory Parallel Port LPT2 is used At the DOS prompt on the computer type filename exe pb 2 lt Return gt Where filename is a function code file such as 356351 exe pb 2 This command decompresses the file and copies it as a binary file into the printer s flash memory Serial Port is used The baud rate information you enter in the following DOS commands must match the selection you made in step 11 The 9600 baud rate is the only selection older versions of DOS can use At the DOS prompt on the computer type MODE COM1 9600 N 8 1 P lt Return gt filename exe pbci1 lt Return gt Where filename is a function code file such as 356351 exe pbc1 This command decompresses the file and copies it as a binary file into the printer s flash memory Caution Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started Interrupting a download will damage the flash memory on the controller board and Print Server card if installed 14 While the file is copied into memory the printer LCD informs you of the load process and status Messages are explained in Table 21 page 260 When the new function code has successfully loaded into flash memory and
47. Print Server to a newTCPportnumber The default number is 9100 for prn Store Commands store pserver tcpsocket TCPportnumber dest destination store pserver tcpsocket 5000 dest dlprn Assign a pre defined TCPportnumber to a particular destination on the LineJet Print Server Therefore if you are using a print method that sends jobs directly to a TCP port number you still have the option to process the job data through this destination setting store pserver novell passwd password store pserver novell passwd mplex Store the password for the LineJet Print Server to use when logging in to a Novell file server This password would have to match one set on the file server store pserver novell user name username store pserver novell user name microl Define a username on the LineJet Print Server to be used when it logs in to a Novell file server to find information This username must match a user pre defined on the Novell file server store pserver novell user passwd password store pserver novell user passwd mplex2 Define a password on the LineJet Print Server for the Novell user already defined This password must match the one stored on the Novell file server Passwords are optional as long as there is not one defined on the file server for the user store pserver novell fserver add del fileservername store pserver novell fserver add fsl Add or remove a server entry on the LineJet Print Server for the Novell file server it will be ser
48. Printing conventions in this manual 19 Printing direction 121 Printing last line of text paper out condition 125 299 Printing speed 27 Printout generating hex dump 109 Printouts configuration 52 hex code 257 Printronix Printing System PPS 160 Proprinter XL Emulation 87 Protect Configs 72 Protect parameters 60 PROTECTED INSTR message 264 Protecting a configuration 60 Protocols 25 RS 232 serial interface 249 RS 422 serial interface 249 selecting 115 serial interface 114 P Series Emulation 84 P Series XQ Emulation 95 PSERVER overview 186 PTX Linefeed 78 PWRSUPP VOLT message 264 Q QMS Code V II 25 R RAM displaying 125 Received data RD signal RS 232 serial interface 249 RS 422 serial interface 249 Regulatory information 267 Remote Shell overview 64 Report Status 119 Request To Send RTS signal RS 232 serial interface 249 Request to Send parameter 116 Reset Cmd CFG Ld LinePrinter 83 PCL Il 79 Reset Mode 29 RESETTING PLEASE WAIT 265 300 Response Polarity Centronics 113 RESTORING BOOT CODE 265 RIB INVLD CMD message 265 RIB INVLD STATE message 265 Ribbon Action 126 Ribbon Adjust 127 RIBBON DRIVE message 265 RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON message 265 Ribbon Size 127 RibbonMinder Fault 127 RIBBONMINDER Menu 126 Root 235 Rot Char Size 105 Routers Unix 171 Windows 151 RPRINTER overview 186 RS 232 serial interface 248 clear to send CTS
49. Server Configuration 10 100Base T 196 Preferred File Server NDS amp Bindery 0 ccccceeceeceeeeeeeteeeees 197 Setting Password Security NDS amp Bindery 199 Adjusting Polling Time NDS amp Bindery 200 Changing The Print Server Name NDS amp Bindery 0 201 Changing The Frame Type NDS amp Bindery ccceeeeeeees 202 Changing The Print Server Mode NDS amp Bindery 05 203 Setting The LineJet Print Server Context NDS 204 Setting The Print Server Preferred NDS Tree NDS 205 Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T cecceeeeeeeeeseeeereees 207 NDS PSERVER Setup Netware 4 X c ccccseseseeeeecteeeeneeees 207 Bindery PSERVER Setup Netware 3 x and 4 X ceeeeeeeees 209 Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS Netware 3 x and 4 x 209 RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup Netware 3 x and 4 x 210 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeenaeeeeeee 212 PSERVER S6tupi tes a hein senate ettate a nies och Meal Sacha 212 RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup cecccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeeses 214 Printing Related onae ER 216 12 Commands r eeoa a E ERE 219 Command Shell Overview ccccceeeeceeeceeeeeneeeceeeeeeneeeseneeeeenaeeseaes 219 Access Method Seanin ik ate nee Wee es ee 219 Main Command Shell Prefixes ccccceeeceeeeseeeeeeteeeeeteeeeneeees 219 Getting Command Hel p cccc
50. Server print server object in Note If the context you choose is different than the one the file server object for the file server you are using is in you must set the context on the LineJet Print Server See Setting The LineJet Print Server Context NDS on page 204 208 17 Click with the right mouse button to bring up a submenu and choose Create from this menu 18 A dialogue titled New Object will pop up In the Class of new object list select Print Server and click on OK 19 Type in the name for the print server in the Print Server name field By default the name is M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits Bindery PSERVER Setup Netware 3 x and 4 x of the print server s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device e g M_091C1A Note The name you use here must match the name stored on the LineJet Print Server This name can be found by using the list pserver command See List Commands on page 230 for more information 20 Select the Define additional properties and click on the Create button 21 Click on Assignments in the dialogue that pops up and then on the Add button 22 Select the printer you created earlier 23 Click on OK to assign this printer to this print server 24 Click on OK to close the printer servers details dialogue and make the changes permanent 25 Physically re power
51. Server system information e g contact name and protocol stacks enabled list tcpip List all current TCP IP network settings e g IP address and subnet mask list test List the status of output tests on the I O ports list time List the current time on the LineJet Print Server list user List the current user definitions e g user names and types list var List all pre defined variables including any newly created ones Any of these defined variables can be referenced in a string by placing a before the variable name e g set model m1 trailer FF Debug Commands The debug set of commands help troubleshoot problems that may occur on the LineJet Print Server Some of the output may be cryptic but it helps when troubleshooting debug eeprom List ROM contents debug io List statistics from the I O port module debug ip List IP stack statistics debug lpd List statistics from the Ipd daemon debug lpq List statistics from the queue module debug mem List statistics from the LineJet Print Server memory module debug nest fserver View the Novell file server s the LineJet Print Server has acknowledged and connected to debug nest ipx Determine whether a board has been bound to the LineJet Print Server under Novell and that the network number is correct for your network 231 Chapter 12 Complete Command List 232 debug nest logs View miscellaneous Novell log messages debug nest odi D
52. This means a printcap file is used to define all printers available on the host and interface scripts are not commonly used Instead LPR LPD printers are defined To manually configure an LPR LPD printer on a BSD Unix system 1 Define an entry for this new printer within the printcap file etc printcap Syntax printername sh pw 80 mx 0 rm LineJetname rp LineJetdestination lp sd usr spool lpd printername 1 usr spool 1lpd printername 1log af usr spool lpd printername acct where printername is any name you would like to give to this new printer LineJetname is the host or IP name of the print server and LineJetdestination is one of the pre defined destinations queues on the device Example LPQ1000 sh pw 80 mx 0 rm spike rp diprn lp sd usr spool lpd LPQ1000 1 usr spool lpd LPQ1000 1log af usr spool lpd LPQ1000 acct 2 Create the spool directory specified by the sd entry in the printcap entry for this printer Example touch usr spool lpd LPQ1000 3 Create the log and account files specified by the 1 and af entries in the printcap entry for this printer Example touch usr spool 1lpd LPQ1000 log touch usr spool 1lpd LPQ1000 acct 4 Create the spool directory to use set the correct permissions and ownership of the spool directory and objects within it and start the printer daemon for this new printer mkdir usr spool lpd LPQ1000 chmod R gtrwx otrx usr
53. Version 356351 Rev 2 07P or later All of these requirements are satisfied with the LineJet and LP Series C and above models However LP Series A and B models require upgrading to gain Page Level Recovery functionality There are three types of PLR that can occur and all three use silent run techniques That is the data is sent to the printer and the printer interprets it but does not start actual printing until the printer reaches a target starting page specified by the spooler e g the page following the last one printed Restarting at a user specified page number in a command Processing of a spool file can be suspended and then resumed It can be suspended by using the spooler command with the suspend parameter or by using the suspendspool command It can be resumed with the spooler command with the resume parameter or by using the resumespool command When the spool file resumes printing it can start exactly where it left off or at another specified page For LineJet printers the optional offset parameter in the spooler command can only be used to specify an absolute offset i e absence of a or sign When the offset parameter is not used printing resumes where it stopped When the offset parameter is used a silent run PLR will occur up until the specified starting place Note The CIPER protocol devices e g C256x using the HP IB interface allow i you to specify the offset parameter with the
54. View key will move the paper down into the print position This function is helpful when aligning forms The new function of the View key is invoked with a long depression of the View key When the View key is pressed and held paper will advance three complete forms allowing tearoff at the rear of the printer After advancing paper three forms for tearoff placing the printer ONLINE will move paper downward two forms and printing will resume The new function of the View key is only available with Function Code Version 356351 Rev 2 07P or later 145 Chapter 7 _ Using Page Level Recovery On LineJet Printers Using Page Level Recovery On LineJet Printers The native mode spooler on MPE iX 5 5 and later supports Page Level Recovery PLR PLR provides the ability to restart printing at any page of a document due to device problems or a suspended spooler Refer to the HP e3000 MPE iX Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual for more information Clarification on how it is handled for LineJet printers is described below Note One feature of the Printer Job Language PJL spooler is the ability to l keep track of pages printed as a part of Page Level Recovery On a paper K jam or paper out condition the printer control panel displays the page number counted For Page Level Recovery to be operational the printer must have a minimum of 4 MB Flash and DRAM memory CMX Controller Version 5 5 or later and be running Function Code
55. Warnings Cautions And Notes cccccssscceessesteeeeesestteesessenaees 19 Printing Conventions Used In This Manual 19 Related DOCUMENTS sisirin ranen nataan are aiekin 20 Printer DNINE APEE E TENE EAE AEE E 21 The LineJet Printer Family asseseessseesssrrssessrreesrrrnnssrrnnesrnnnnnseennes 21 Taking Care Of Your Printer seeeeesesressiressrrerrrrsrnrsrrrerrrssre 23 Standard Features cccccccccccccccccccsessesseeeececeseceseeessessesneaeseseeeeees 23 Graphics Options singin aiaia i aa K 25 Protocols And Emulations cccccccceccecececssssssssssssesessseeseeeeseeeees 25 Line Matrix Printinge AEEA E 26 Printing Ope ed h e a Re a Hentai 27 LineJet Print Servet iieii ttiie a a e aeri iiaa aet 28 What Special Features Are Available ccccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeees 28 Print Server InteraCE sr eiie ranean a ea TAE EaR aa 29 Downloading Function Code In LineJet PMTCT S isise e a deta AOR 31 Mtroduchiom sasona aA E TO 31 Downloading In A Nutshell cc eeeeceeeeeeenneeeeeeeneeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeaaees 31 Preparation For Downloading eccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaees 32 Copying Function Code To Your COmputel ccccsscceecesssteeeeeessaes 33 Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer 34 Loading Code Through The Parallel Or Serial Port 0006 34 Loading Code Through The Ethernet Port Using ftp 00 36 Configuring The Printer esseere
56. You can designate the number of minutes after which the printer will go into sleep mode The range of time is from 0 to 60 minutes The default is 15 minutes Pressing any key on the control panel or sending a print job to the printer will turn off sleep mode Diagnostics Diagnostics Menu The diagnostics menu allows you to choose the diagnostics tests to be run and provides you with important system information Options on this menu as shown below are described in the following pages If Ethernet adapter is present DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests Test Width Paper Out System Print Statistics Dots Memory Shift Recycle Full Width 40 dots X Megabytes On x x Hrs All E s 80 columns 4 76 dots Print x x Hrs E s TOF Print Strokes All H s Print Lines All Underlines 11 inch Pages All Black Shuttle Slow Shuttle Fast Shuttle Only Phase Printer 217 500 Ipm 123 1000 Ipm 62 1500 lpm 1 to 2000 Paperout Adj Burnin Test Print Error Log Clear Error Log E Net Test Page Diagnostics Printer Tests The printer tests are used to check the print quality and printer operation Note Your Customer Service Engineer typically runs these tests They are y described in more detail in the LineJet Printers Maintenance Manual The Printer Tests parameters are described below For test running procedures see page 255 e Shift Recycle A sliding alp
57. You will be able to determine the exact state of the printer from the printer status screen as the shown in Figure 8 Netscape I O Port Figure 8 WWW Printer Status Screen 65 Chapter 3 _ Configuring The Print Server 66 4 Overview The Configuration Menus Once you have familiarized yourself with the configuration process using the tutorial information in Chapter 3 you are ready to complete your configuration of the printer This chapter provides descriptions for each parameter provided by the configuration menus Figure 9 shows the configuration main menu and its first level parameters The remainder of this chapter includes illustrations of many additional submenus and parameters nested beneath each of the main menu options 67 Chapter 4 _ Configuration Main Menu Configuration Main Menu OFFLINE CONFIG ACTIVE EMULATION MAINT MISC CONTROL EMULATION see page 74 see page 109 Continued on see page 71 see page 73 the next page Load Config PCL II PCL II Hex Dump Mode 0 8 LP PLUS LP PLUS Disable Save Config IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL amp LP Enable 1 8 IGP VGL CODE V amp LP IGP VGL CODE V amp LP Power up State Print Config Online Current Offline Factory Display Language Power Up English All Italian 1 8 French Delete Config German 1 8 Spanish Power Up Config Power Stacker 0 8 Enable Protect Configs Disable D
58. active and queued jobs and I O port status for a given ioport or jobID Specifying one of these parameters will shorten the output focusing on the particular I O port or print job specified Miscellaneous Commands cancel jobID cancel dlprn 10 Remove a job from an I O port queue Use lpstat to find a particular job ID first start fox tts loopb prn start fox prn Begin a debugging test on one of the I O ports on the LineJet Print Server The tests available are fox A continuous stream of text sent to the attached printer This is a good test for troubleshooting hardware as long as the attached printer supports text output tts A continuous stream of Gandalf 400C TTS compatible text sent to the attached printer loopb Loopback test Any input characters from the device attached to the I O port is echoed back stop prn stop prn Stop an output test on an I O port disable ioport destination disable prn Disable an ioport so that queued jobs are not printed or disable a destination so jobs can not be queued to it enable ioport destination enable prn Enable an ioport so that queued jobs are printed or enable a destination so jobs can be queued to it close tcp TCPindexnumber close tcp 3 Force a TCP IP connection between a TCP IP host and the LineJet Print Server to close The TCPindexnumber can be retrieved from debug tcp output ping s hostIPaddress datasize packetnumber ping 192 75 11 30 ping
59. again to SHIFT RECYCLE LEFT ARROW to E NET TEST PAGE or if something else displays press left arrow repeatedly until E Net Test Page is displayed oap op 4 Verify the Subnet mask Netmask is correct in two locations on the E Net Test Page under Network Information and TCP IP Routing Table The Netmask must be the same in both locations For example if the desired Netmask is listed as 255 255 255 0 under Network Information and if the Netmask is listed as 255 255 255 255 under TCP IP Routing Table then the Netmask does not match and you must correct the Netmask To correct an incorrectly associated Subnet mask Netmask complete the following steps a Take the printer offline b Modify the Gateway from the front panel to the default address of 0 0 0 0 142 c Place the printer online and wait for the front panel to display E Net Ready This will write the Gateway address to the network I F NvRam d Take the printer offline and enter the desired Gateway address e Place the printer online and wait for the front panel to display E Net Ready This will write the Gateway address to the network I F NvRam f Print E Net Test Page and verify both listed Netmasks are the same and that xxx xxx xxx xxx is alive is printed under Default Gateway Ping Test xxx xxx xxx xxx Gateway IP address 5 Inspect Printer Destinations on the E Net Test Page Reprint the E Net Test Page and verify the backcha
60. any data past the forms width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width Define LF Code e LF CR LF Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received The next print position is print position 1 of the next line 95 Chapter 4 96 Emulation Menu e LF LLF Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position of the next line Compressed Print Controls which host command sets compressed printing e CHAR 01 SOH e CHAR 03 ETX e CHAR 09 HT Elong Alt Font Controls which host command sets elongated double high fonts and extended character set ELNG BS hex 08 FONT SO hex 0E ELNG SO FONT BS HS Print Controls which host command sets high speed printing e CHAR 02 STX e CHAR 03 ETX e CHAR 09 HT EVFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting e Enable Enables the VFU and selects P Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU e Disable Disables VFU processing Upr Case Select Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the host computer When enabled all characters will be printed in uppercase e Disable Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as lowercase and uppercase characters received from the computer as uppercase e Enable P
61. connected Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway and remove any obstructions Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents Power back on the printer If this message recurs contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer FIRMWARE ERROR Application software tried to perform an illegal printer function or damaged memory detected on board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer FRAMING ERROR Serial framing error Serial interface Check your serial host interface parameter settings if necessary adjust them so that they match the settings of the attached host HAM COIL OPEN Electrical malfunction of one or more hammer coils Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer HAMMER COIL BAD X X X Coil failed current test at power up Record message clear to continue printing and contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer HB NOT INSTALLD Self test does not detect hammer coils Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 262 Table 21 Fault Messages LCD Message Troubleshooting Table continued Displayed Message Explanation Action Required HMR BANK FAN FLT Sensors cannot detect current in fan circuit Power off printer and remove paper path Check that fan cable is connected Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway remove any obstr
62. controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to the host If there is enough room in the printer buffer the printer will send a high signal If the buffer is full the printer will send a low signal DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data If the host sends data during an unsafe condition data will be lost Baud Rate Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer Baud rate is the speed at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer The choices for the RS 232 and RS 422 interfaces are 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 The default is 9600 baud Note If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater you may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter from the default 1 Kbyte to improve performance Word Length Sets the length of the serial data word The length of the data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host computer The default is 8 bits 115 Chapter 4 116 Host Interface Menu Stop Bits Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word Either one or two stop bits can be selected The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in the host computer The default is 1 bit Parity Set for odd parity even parity mark sense or no parity The setting must match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer The default is None Data Term Ready T
63. d command as even dot plot e Double high Interprets the ESC d Command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility 93 Chapter 4 Emulation Menu Serial Matrix Character Set Menu Character Set from page 92 Factory Default IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult OCR A OCR B Latin 2 8859 2 Primary Subset ASCII USA Primary Subset ASCII USA ASCII USA EBCDIC ASCII USA French French German German German Swedish English R eai NR Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 Swedish Finnish Italian aed Italian English Spanish Spanish Dutch Japanese Japanese French French Canadian French Canadian Spanish Dutch Latin American Italian Finnish Polish POL1 DEC 256 ELOT 928 Danish II Turkish Swiss Greek Greek Spanish II Japanese Latin Am II Extended Subset Extended Subset Multinational Code Page 437 Barcode 10 CPI Code Page 850 Mult DP 10 CPI Mult DP 12 CPI Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek Mult LQ 10 CPI Greek DP 10 CPI Greek DP 12 CPI Greek LQ 10 CPI Grap DP 10 CPI Grap LQ 10 CPI ELOT 927 Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 Sci DP 10 CPI Greek Sci DP 12 CPI Sci LQ 10 CPI PC851 Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G LtGk 12G 94 P Series
64. entry The LineJet Print Server can be used in a NetWare 4 environment with either of the following options e Set the LineJet Print Server up as a PSERVER replacing a dedicated printer e Set the LineJet Print Server up as an RPRINTER interacting with an existing PSERVER see page 191 Following a PSERVER setup bindery emulation is required To configure the LineJet Print Server as a PSERVER in a NetWare 4 environment 1 Log in to the Novell as supervisor 2 Enter PCONSOLE 3 Press F4 4 Select Print Queues 189 Chapter 10 Novell Host Configuration 190 So Oe ON Ode OF 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Press INSERT to add a queue Type in a new queue name and press ENTER Press ESCAPE Select Print Servers Press INSERT to add the new print server Type the name of the LineJet Print Server By default it is M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the Ethernet address e g M_OOOBF5 Select this new print server and press ENTER Select Printers Press INSERT to add a printer to the list Type in the name of one of the default destinations on the unit for the Name field and go to the type field Press ENTER at this field and select Defined Elsewhere If Defined Elsewhere is not available choose Parallel Press ENTER on the Print Queues Assigned field Press INSERT to display all queues select
65. found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022 The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication equipment Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures RAB PRN EAE we REEMA T ome ATH ERHALT EMERE PMS OH R Bx vb aa A oa aii whys TE ZOEN R MARRRERCT ORDER RRR THATE E ERGE ESSEC TIENU ET COMBI AHS ET itIER ADENY ET WOoCI lt A 273 Appendix A _ Communication Notices WAAR m FELASA Pon A RSE ART EAP DLP FUR PEARSE PJAT BVT M B Paper Specifications And Forms Design Introduction LP Series and LineJet printers use dot matrix line printing technology which permits a high degree of printing flexibility Dot matrix technology enables the user to print graphic images line drawn characters special characters and multiple alphabets The first section of this appendix lists general specifications for continuous form paper Specific brands or types of paper are not recommended Adherence to these specifications will ensure the best print quality and reliable operation The second section goes into more detail providing definitions
66. gt cd d4prn lt Return gt Use d4prn to avoid potential conflict with backchannel if dlprn is used bin lt Return gt put filename prg lt Return gt Caution Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started w Interrupting a download will damage the flash memory on the controller board and Print Server card 10 As the file downloads the ftp program shows the progress as a percentage as does the display on the control panel of the printer When the download is complete the printer will be placed ONLINE Exit the ftp program by typing quit lt Return gt When the new program has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself and is ONLINE E Net Ready reconfigure the printer using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 Remember to designate the correct Power On configuration Note If the ON LINE key is pressed before the display reads E Net Ready the Ethernet PCA may not initialize properly resulting in all zeroes for the IP K address In this case power off then on and wait for E Net Ready to display before pressing any keys 12 Power the printer off then on to verify the correct saved configuration loads at power up 13 Reconnect the printer data cable s 37 Chapter 2 _ Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer 38 Configuring The Printer Overview Note Configuration directly affects printer operation Do
67. in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Bi Tronics port buffer You can designate the size of the printer buffer from 1 through 16 Kbytes 111 Chapter 4 Host Interface Menu Centronics Parallel Submenu 112 from page 110 Note The Centronics parameters in the printer must be set the same as the l interface in the host computer at the other end of the data cable of the K printer Otherwise the printer might not work online and data characters from the computer might not print or might print as garbled text Factory Default Centronics Data Bit 8 PI Ignored Data Resp Busy on Latch Polarity Polarity Strobe Data On Enable Enable Standard Standard Enable Leading Disable Disable Inverted Inverted Disable Trailing Prime TOF Buffer Size Signal Action in K Disable Reset 1 Enable Do Nothing 1 16 The Centronics submenu provides the options and settings available to configure the interface as required for your application These options and available settings are outlined in the following paragraphs Data Bit 8 e Enable Allows access to the extended ASCII character set e Disable The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a zero regardless of its actual setting PI Ignored The PI Paper Instruction signal is used to control vertica
68. inch Pages To view options press v Down a Up gt Next 4 Prev To select an option press ENTER To return to main menu press CLEAR To exit menu press ON LINE Default Setting Figure 9 Configuration Main Menu continued 69 Chapter 4 _ Configuration Main Menu The first level configuration menu options are briefly described below e CONFIG CONTROL Allows you to save print load and delete entire sets of configuration parameters These options are described briefly in this chapter and covered in detail in Chapter 3 e ACTIVE EMULATION Allows you to select either Hewlett Packard s Printer Control Language PCL II or LP Plus e If you select PCL II you can select the optional IGP PGL or IGP VGL Code V emulations if installed e If you select LP Plus you can select Epson FX Proprinter XL or P Series e EMULATION If PCL II is the active emulation PCL II will display and you can select its parameters for configuration e Ifthe optional IGP PGL or Code V emulations are installed you can access their configuration parameters e If LP Plus is the active emulation Epson FX Proprinter XL and P Series configuration parameters are available e MAINT MISC Provides miscellaneous functions such as printing a hex dump selecting a display language and choosing whether the printer will power up offline or online e HOST INTERFACE Allows you to select the printer interface depend
69. integrity of data printed printer For special printer feedback ioport Printer error messages determined through the parallel port pins 224 Set Commands set logpath logpath port TCPportnumber email syslog set logpath 13 port 2000 Determine where the log information should be sent for a print job or attached printer The choices are TCPportnumber TCP port number ranging from 1024 to 65000 email Particular user s email address This address is set using the set sysinfo email emailname IPaddress command syslog Acentral TCP IP host running the SYSLOG daemon This host is set using the set sysinfo syslog IPaddress command set logpath from default Set all logpath settings back to factory defaults set logpath from stored Set all current logpath settings to the values stored in flash memory set model model name newname set model ml name landscape Change the current name of the model to a new name as indicated by newname This newname must be nine characters or less or it will be truncated These names are case sensitive set model model type raw set model m2 type raw Set the model type to raw so that it does not process the data passing through it in any way set model model banner ps text auto after set model m2 banner text Determine whether a banner page should be added for print jobs passing through the model mapped destination queue auto will determine which type is needed depending on the type of print job data pas
70. ipx Set the LineJet Print Server debugging information type Usually this information includes unexpected errors or exceptions from the print server divided into these groups sys General system messages tcp TCP stack messages ipx IPX stack messages spx SPX stack messages This is not printer or job logging information 228 set sysinfo logport null syslog set sysinfo logport null Define where the debugging information should be sent to This can be sent to an output device off of the LineJet Print Server I O port or to a central TCP IP host running a SYSLOG daemon To set this host use the command set sysinfo syslog hostIPaddress set sysinfo email emailname IPaddress set sysinfo email joe 192 75 11 5 Define the user email address to receive printer and job logging information from a particular logpath on the LineJet Print Server emailname is the host or IP name of the user and IPaddress is the IP address where the mail is stored on your network set sysinfo syslog hostIPaddress set sysinfo syslog 192 75 11 30 Set the IP address of the host running the SYSLOG daemon LineJet Print Server debugging or print job and printer logging information can be sent to that IP address set sysinfo dns DNSserverIPaddress set sysinfo dns 192 75 11 2 Set your DNS server IP address so the LineJet Print Server can resolve host names when used with its built in Telnet and Ping clients set sysinfo descramblekey hexvalue set sy
71. key value OFF ON Default IP With the dipswitches in this configuration the LineJet Print Server boots up with factory default settings However the stored settings in flash memory are intact Setting dipswitch 2 to ON does not clear any settings stored in flash memory instead it boots the unit with the IP settings in flash memory temporarily ignored ON ON Reserved This dipswitch setting is not for customer use 2 Introduction Downloading Function Code In LineJet Printers Downloading the function code is equivalent to updating firmware in the printer This chapter explains how to load function code into LineJet printers You must download function code when you require upgraded firmware for maintenance or other reasons the CMX controller board is replaced the flash memory SIMM is replaced the LineJet Print Server the internal network card is installed or replaced you need different emulation software or buy the VGL or PGL graphics option after the printer is installed Downloading In A Nutshell Updating the function code in a LineJet printer consists of three tasks 1 Obtaining the appropriate download file and loading it into the PC or laptop you will use to download the code into the printer Obtaining the appropriate interface cable if necessary Printing all saved configurations in the printer making the function code upgrade and restoring your saved pri
72. latest Function Code The printer can be upgraded to the latest Function Code Model C320xD if CMX version 5 5 is present in the printer and 4 MB of Flash and 4 MB of DRAM are installed A model printers may need a new CMX 4 MB Flash and 4 MB DRAM B model printers will need 4 MB Flash and 4 MB DRAM To upgrade A or B model Flash memory and DRAM do the following 1 Remove the 1 MB Flash P N 202554 001 and install a 4 MB Flash P N 202417 001 in Bank 0 of the flash SIMM sockets on the CMX PCA This is the flash socket closest to the front of the printer 2 A and B printers were shipped with 2 MB of DRAM P N 202502 001 installed in Bank 0 of the DRAM SIMM sockets You can add another 2 MB DRAM to the rear DRAM socket on the CMX board filling both sockets with 2 2 MB DRAM for the required total of 4 MB the preferred method or you can install one 4 MB SIMM P N 202412 001 in Bank 0 of the DRAM SIMM sockets 3 Upgrade to the latest Function Code C320xD Function Code 4 Check with Technical Support to confirm the latest available Function Code download file Copying Function Code To Your Computer In order to download function code to a printer if using a serial or parallel port the function code file must reside in a PC or laptop computer running any of the following operating systems MS DOS PC DOS or DOS session on Windows 95 98 Windows NT or Windows 2000 Note that the downl
73. motion Clear jam and reload paper See Quick Reference Guide If this message recurs contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH The program successfully loaded into printer RAM and the checksum matched The old program is now being deleted from flash memory None CLOSE PLATEN The forms thickness lever is open Close the forms thickness lever COIL HOT One or more hammer coils are overheating Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer CTL VOLT FAIL Controller voltage failure Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer DIAGNOSTIC PASSED The printer passed its memory and hardware initialization tests None DRVR CIR BAD Hammer coil count test failed Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 260 Fault Messages Table 21 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table continued Displayed Message Explanation Action Required ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID Printer cannot find the data controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt Download the program again If the message occurs again call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX The printer found a defective memory location Call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID Printer cannot find the eng
74. often If print quality does not improve even after cleaning contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer Warning Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer A 7 Vor dem S ubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu unterbrechen D branchez l alimentation avant de nettoyer l imprimante Desconecte la fuente de energ a antes de limpiar la impresora Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante Exterior Cleaning Clean with a soft lint free cloth and mild detergent soap Dishwashing liquid works well Do not use abrasive powders or chemical solvents Clean the windows with plain water or mild window cleaner Always apply the cleaning solution to the cloth never pour cleaning solution directly onto the printer Interior Cleaning Over time particles of paper and ink accumulate inside impact printers This is normal Paper dust and ink build up must be removed periodically to avoid degraded print quality Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the platen and ribbon path To clean the interior of the printer perform the following steps and refer to Figure 18 for cabinet models and Figure 19 for pedestal models 1 Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord 2 Open the printer cover Fully raise the forms thickness lever Unload paper Refer to the LineJet Printers Quick Reference Guide 251 Chapter _ 15 Routine Service Unlatch both ribb
75. otherwise transfer all or any portion of the Software Product separate from the printer without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard d You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software Product e You may not transmit the Software Product over a network by telephone or electronically using any means or reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the Software f You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software Product from unauthorized disclosure or use 3 Transfer You may transfer the Software Product with the printer but only if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the Software Product and printer Limited Software Product Warranty Hewlett Packard warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with specifications published by Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions Remedy Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Hewlett Packard in connection with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the same version and revision level Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies 1 THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
76. ready for operation All parameters are effective as long as the printer is on When you turn off the printer the parameters will be erased from memory 49 Chapter 3 50 CONFIG CONTROL Changing Parameters Saving Your New Configuration Factory Default Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config Power Up Protect Config Configs ONOaBRWND A configuration must be saved in order to load it later You can save up to eight configurations to meet different print job requirements For example Config 1 Selects Standard density 10 CPI 6 LPI 11 inch forms Config 2 Selects Sparse density 10 CPI 8 LPI 8 inch forms The configurations are saved and stored in memory they will not be lost if you power off the printer Later you can load one of the configurations for a specific print job This eliminates the need to change settings LPI forms length etc for each new job See page 54 for information about loading configurations You may want to print your configurations page 52 and store them in a safe place such as inside the printer cabinet If you are going to change and save parameters for both the PCL II and LinePrinter Plus emulations remember to save the changes for the PCL II emulation before you select LP Plus as the active emulation page 73 or vice versa Once you change active emulations any changes to the previously
77. response store pserver smb workgroup Acme ok reset print server will need about 30 seconds to reset session disconnected VVVVVV Vv You should now be able to browse the LineJet Print Server in Network Neighborhood which has resources d1prn d2prn d3prn d4prn e The TCP IP values are not stored in the printer configuration so it is not necessary to use the printer configuration menu for the above e Ifthe printer is attached to your network via UTP cable and you entered a gateway value then executing the E Net Test Page will verify your settings and execute a ping to the gateway A good response is gw IP is alive which assures you of a functioning network connection cable is good connection is functional values are correct all that remains is setting up printing Method 2 Setting TCP IP Values Using A Network Start with the printer powered off Have the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway values ready For arp assignment the syntax is arp s ipaddress MAC address Example using Windows 95 98 NT On a DOS command prompt enter arp s 192 168 20 20 00 80 72 09 00 5F set the static arp value be certain to replace the IP Address of this example with a valid one of your own list arp a to ensure you have the static entry Example using Unix not AIX On a command prompt enter arp s 192 168 20 20 00 80 72 09 00 5F set the static arp value be certain to replace the IP Address of
78. section provides information on possible solutions to some standard configuration errors If you require technical support please have as much of the following information available when you call i Jie PO S 6 What level of software are you running What type of attachment do you have What is your host operating system Give a detailed description of the problem How often and when does the problem occur Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your LineJet Print Server configuration NetWare 3 x No PSERVER Connection Has the LineJet Print Server been power cycled once the PCONSOLE steps were completed This will make the print server boot up and realize which print queue and file server it needs to service Is the LineJet Print Server already servicing a queue on another file server If so it can not service another file server at the same time When defining a new print server within PCONSOLE did you use the correct name for the LineJet Print Server e g M_071C1A By default it only recognizes itself as M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of its Ethernet address found on the configuration printout When defining a new printer name within PCONSOLE did you use a pre defined destination queue rather than a name of your own By default the LineJet Print Server only recognizes names like d1prn
79. software option s for this model ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID The printer does not see a program in flash memory There is no program in printer memory Download program again ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED The security PAL is not present or has failed Call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX Hardware failure in DRAM or CMX controller circuitry Call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 261 Chapter 15 Diagnosing Problems Table 21 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table continued Displayed Message Explanation Action Required ERROR WRITING TO FLASH Hardware or software fault in flash memory Download the program again If the message occurs again call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR WRONG The printer received the complete Download the program again CHECKSUM program but the checksum did not If the message occurs again match The data was corrupted call your Hewlett Packard during download Customer Service Engineer ETHERNET ADAPTER LineJet Print Server interface is None BEING INITIALIZED processing the boot procedure ETHERNET LineJet Print Server interface has None DETECTED established communication EXHAUST FAN FLT Sensors cannot detect current in fan circuit Power off the printer and remove the paper path Check that the fan cable connector is
80. spool 1pd LPQ1000 chmod R daemon daemon usr spool 1lpd LPQ1000 lpc start LPQ1000 177 Chapter 9 _ Unix Host Configuration 5 Start the printer daemon for this new printer Example lpc start LPQ1000 You now have a new printer which relies on LPR LPD to print to a LineJet Print Server printer Use the following command to test printing Syntax lpr printername filename Example lpr LPQ1000 etc hosts 178 FTP Printing FTP Printing The LineJet Print Server contains four logical printers destinations labeled as diprn through d4prn For FTP printing establish an FTP session followed by a put to the dest Since the printer emulation can be PCL II Epson or Proprinter be sure the file you put to print is both printable and suitable for the printer emulation Straight text is usable in all cases Example Type the commands as shown followed by the enter key Assume the file you want to print is etc inetd conf which is a simple text file ftp MyLineJet MyLineJet needs to be a ping able DNS name or if no DNS in the local etc hosts file or it can be a dotted IP Address for the LineJet Print Server at the user prompt type root at the password prompt press ENTER default password for root is blank until you change it cd dest diprn put etc inetd conf quit Note If the file you want to print is a binary file enter the command bin before u the put command Remote Shell Printing T
81. text ribbons The pedestal model ships with 60 yard text ribbons and the cabinet models ship with 100 yard text ribbons Note Only cabinet model printers can use 100 yard ribbons For more information please contact any of our worldwide sales offices of HP Channel Partners or check out http Awww hp com go linejet For the location of the nearest office in the United States call 1 800 637 7740 267 Appendix A _ Ribbon Specifications Ribbon Life Scrape Description Use On Pn C3207A Box of six 60 yard Any LineJet Printer 30 Million black text ribbons Any HP LP Series Printer Characters C3208A Box of six 100 yard LineJet 500Q 50 Million black text ribbons LineJet 1000Q Characters LineJet 1500Q LPQ475 LPQ500 LPQ800 LPQ1000 LPQ1200 LPQ1400 LPQ1500 C3209A Box of six 60 yard Any LineJet Printer 27 Million OCR Bar Code Any HP LP Series Printer Characters ribbons or 2 800 Shipping Labels C3210A Box of six 100 yard LineJet 500Q 45 Million OCR Bar Code LineJet 1000Q Characters ribbons LineJet 1500Q or LPQ475 4 667 LPQ500 Shipping LPQ800 Labels LPQ1000 LPQ1200 LPQ1400 LPQ1500 C3212A Box of six 60 yard Any LineJet Printer 30 Million non inked security Any HP LP Series Printer Characters ribbons 268 Printer Dimensions Cabinet Model Height Width Depth Weight 42 5 inches 108 cm 27 inches 68 6 cm 29 inches 73 7 cm 225 Ibs 1
82. the print server object in the same context as the file server object it connects to is stored in HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http LineJetIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and y press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 204 Setting The Print Server Preferred NDS Tree NDS 3 Look under the Novell section and enter the new context in the NDS Context field 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re power the printer to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print Server s IP address followed by a colon then root ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell context context 4 Reset the unit to make the changes take effect reset Setting The Print Server Preferred NDS Tree NDS The LineJet Print Server supports Novell environments that have multiple trees If your environmen
83. the printer control panel to access the configuration menu see Chapter 4 for configuration menu information From the DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests menu choose the E Net Test Page When the page prints look under the TCP ACCESS TABLE section for the TCP access list entries To add or delete a TCP access list entry refer to TCP Access Lists on page 237 Note When the following procedure is used the TCP access list will be cleared but all IP addresses will need to be entered again after the procedure is complete To reset all TCP IP values to the factory defaults when access is impossible 1 Obtain a printer configuration printout using the control panel See Chapter 4 for configuration menu information Power off the printer On the Print Server Interface place SWITCH 2 in the down position Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state On the Print Server Interface place SWITCH 2 in the up position Par ON From a workstation attached to this network segment create an ARP entry The LineJet Print Server IP address and hardware or MAC address are needed At the workstation enter arp s lt ipaddress gt lt MACaddress gt ping lt ipaddress gt 7 Try to ping this IP address to see if the LineJet Print Server can be seen on your network If the interface does not respond verify you are on the same network segment as the printer and that the ARP entry was created 8 Telnet into the Print Serv
84. the printer to make the new settings take effect Bindery PSERVER Setup Netware 3 x and 4 x A Bindery PSERVER setup is possible under both Netware 3 x and Netware 4 x If you are using Netware 4 x Bindery emulation is required Please consult your Novell manual on how to set up Bindery emulation A Bindery setup using PCONSOLE in Netware 3 x is described in NetWare Version 3 x RPRINTER Setup on page 188 The setup using PCONSOLE in Netware 4 x is described in NetWare Version 4 x RPRINTER Setup on page 191 Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS Netware 3 x and 4 x If you would like to reference a Bindery queue when you perform your PSERVER setup in NDS you must create a PSERVER object for the LineJet Print Server on the file server where the Bindery queue resides This is important because in order to service the queue the LineJet Print Server must log on to the queue s file server Since the queue is not an NDS queue the LineJet Print Server cannot log in under NDS so it must log in under Bindery This will only work if there is a valid PSERVER object on the file server This PSERVER object must have the same name that was used for the NDS setup By default this will be M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print server s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device e g M_091C1A This PSERVER object does not need to have any printers or queues assigned to it Also when refer
85. to such defects 3 HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain manufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP If customer schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of 300 000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the subj
86. turn off banner pages and form feeds if this is already taken care of within an application or on the LineJet Print Server Doubling up of these types of print features is easy to do since these options are provided both on the LineJet Print Server in a model and within the print command e Are you running the latest version of PSERVER later than 1 22 If not upgrade the PSERVER software e InaPSERVER setup did you ensure that the printer name e g d1prn was set up as Defined Elsewhere e Is the timeout option in the CAPTURE command set high enough so the printer does not time out before the print processing has had a chance to complete This can be a problem with graphic jobs Some other things to consider when garbled data persists are e tab expansion xtab set on in a model with graphic jobs e the correct driver for the printer if printing from within Windows For additional information on these suggestions or on various Novell printing mechanisms please refer to your NetWare User Manuals 217 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T 218 1 2 Commands Command Shell Overview The LineJet Print Server comes with an in depth command shell which allows you to manipulate objects like destinations I O ports and models Additionally it provides you with monitoring and troubleshooting capabilities Access Methods There are many ways this command shell can be accessed e built in HTML forms e aTel
87. 00 Windows NT OS 2 v v v Windows 95 98 y AS 400 v v Note AS 400 can use bootp as of OS 400 v4 3 e arp Easy to use but cannot be routed so printer and host computer must be on same network segment Requires the use of print server MAC e bootp Workhorse method Can be routed and allows assigning of IP address subnet mask and gateway value in one step e DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Easy in concept but a poor choice for printers because printers must always have the same IP values If the MAC value is known however DHCP can be used to facilitate the location of print servers If you are unsure which method to use you can use the front panel of the printer to set the TCP IP values without a live network connection For bootp arp and NetBEUI NetBIOS the MAC address of the LineJet Print Server is required If the LineJet Print Server is pre installed the MAC address can be obtained by using the LineJet printer diagnostic print test E Net Test Page or by using the printer control panel to view the MAC Address value in the ETHERNET PARAMS configuration submenu see page 120 for details In addition a label attached to the rear of the printer shows the MAC address which reads 00 80 72 xx yy zz This value is also known as the hardware address or ethernet address The DHCP is useful to locate a print server DHCP generally is not useful for using other than NetBEUI NetBIOS
88. 02 1 kg unpackaged 285 Ibs 129 3 kg packaged Cabinet Model with Power Stacker Option Height Width Depth Weight Pedestal Model Height Width Depth Weight 42 5 inches 108 cm 27 inches 68 6 cm 32 5 inches 82 5 cm 246 Ibs 112 kg unpackaged 306 Ibs 139 kg packaged 35 inches 88 9 cm 24 6 inches 62 5 cm 20 7 inches 52 6 cm 105 Ibs 47 6 kg unpackaged 115 Ibs 52 2 kg packaged Environmental Characteristics Temperature Operating 41 to 104 F 5 to 40 C up to 5000 feet 1524 meters 41 to 90 F 5 to 32 C up to 8000 feet 2438 meters Storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Relative Humidity Operating 15 to 80 non condensing Storage 10 to 90 non condensing 269 Appendix A Electrical Characteristics Electrical Characteristics ENERGY STAR LineJet printers comply with the requirements of the ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program of the U S Environmental Protection Agency When in the reduced power state the printer displays Power Saver Mode and is activated at the control panel 270 Printing Typical Current LineJet LineJet LineJet LineJet 500P 500Q 1000Q 1500Q Printing Typical 2 15A 2 43A 3 28A 4 37A Printing Maximum 3 60A 3 05A 4 39A 6 06A Non Printing 0 90A 1 17A 1 19A 1 16A Power Printing Typical 190W 191W 271W 364W Printing Maximum 320W 244W 380W 514W Non Pr
89. 1 9 networkConf htm1 Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and u press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no default password 171 Chapter 9 Unix Host Configuration At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays click in the first field below the Gateway heading and type in the IP address of the default router gateway for the LineJet Print Server subnet Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server to make sure the new setting is in effect Unix Host Configuration 172 There may be times when you would prefer to or have to perform the manual setup steps for a new printer definition There may also be times when you require a less common print solution such as direct socket capabilities This section covers these additional setups Printing Setup On HP UX Method 1 SAM A simple way to set up printing on HP UX is using SAM the system administration tool 1 2 3 4 At the command prompt in a terminal session start SAM Double click on Printers Plotters Under Actions choose Add Remote Printer In the entry panel that opens make the following entries remember Unix is case sensitive so d1prn is not the same as D1PRN a For Printer Name enter anything you want This is actually the Unix Queue name for example Accounting b For Remote System Name enter the DNS pingable name fo
90. 3 Set the user type to root set user type snmp root 4 Set the password for the snmp user set user passwd snmp snmppassword 5 Save the changes save The user snmp is now created and snmppassword is the only community string which will allow write access set snmp manager index ipaddress trap community The Print Server continuously generates traps but unless the trap table is filled in no SNMP manager will receive this information To set the Print Server to send traps to a particular SNMP manager use this command to add an SNMP manager to the trap table index is the index number of the trap table ipaddress is the IP address of the SNMP manager receiving traps trap community is the community string sent along with the trap information set sysinfo name newname set sysinfo name salesprinter Set a descriptive name defined by newname for LineJet Print Server identification purposes This is not used in the operation of the print server in any way set sysinfo location description set sysinfo location salesdept Set the physical location of the LineJet Print Server This is for identification purposes and is not used in the operation of the print server in any way set sysinfo contact contactname set sysinfo contact Paul_Harris Set a person or department to contact in case of print server trouble 227 Chapter 12 Complete Command List set sysinfo loginfo sys tcp ipx spx set sysinfo loginfo sys
91. 60 CLOSE PLATEN 260 COIL HOT 260 CTL VOLT FAIL 260 DRVR CIR BAD 260 ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED 262 ETHERNET DETECTED 262 EXHAUST FAN FLT 262 FIRMWARE ERROR 262 FRAMING ERROR 262 HAM COIL OPEN 262 HB NOT INSTALLD 262 ILL EXT BUS ACC 263 ILL INST ACCSS 263 ILLGL OPR ACCSS 263 INTAKE FAN FAULT 263 LO DRV SHORT 263 LOAD PAPER 263 PAP BAD TABLE 263 PAP BSY TOO LNG 263 PAP FIFO OVEREL 263 PAP FIFO UNDREL 263 PAP ILLGL ST 264 PAP INCMPL ENER 264 PAP INVLD CMD 264 PAP INVLD PARM 264 PAP NOT SCHED 264 PAP NT AT SPEED 264 PAP UNEXP INT 264 PARITY ERROR 264 296 PRINTER HOT 264 PROTECTED INSTR 264 PWRSUPP VOLT 264 RIB INVLD CMD 265 RIB INVLD STAT 265 RIBBON DRIVE 265 RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON 265 SECURITY CODE VIOLATION 265 SHUTL INV CMD 265 SHUTL INV PARM 265 SHUTTLE JAM 265 SOFTWARE ERROR 265 STACK OVERFLOW 265 STACK UNDERFLOW 266 TCB CORRUPTED 266 UNDEF INTERRUPT 266 UNDFNED OPCODE 266 UP DRV SHORT 266 WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER 266 Features list 23 28 FF Valid at TOF 88 FIRMWARE ERROR message 262 Flash messages CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH 260 263 DIAGNOSTICS PASSED 260 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID 261 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX 261 ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID 261 ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX 261 ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED 261 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED 261 ERROR NVRAM FAILURE 2
92. 61 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM 261 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH 261 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE 261 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID 261 ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED 261 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXxX 261 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH 261 262 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM 262 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX 263 RESETTING PLEASE WAIT 265 RESTORING BOOT CODE 265 SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR 265 TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN 266 Font Attributes 81 Font Set 108 formfeeds 181 Forms slewing speed 122 Framing error handling 250 FRAMING ERROR message 262 G Gateway Address control panel configuration 62 Getting Help Command 219 Graphics Density 77 Graphics Options 104 Graphics creating 25 Guest 235 H HAM COIL OPEN message 262 Handshaking Bi Tronics interface 245 HB NOT INSTALLD message 262 Hex code printout 257 Hex Dump Mode parameter 109 High Speed Print 96 Host Configuration Novell 186 Unix 172 Host interface menu 110 Host Setup Windows 3 1 161 Host vs Manual 172 HP 3000 Configuration 139 HP e3000 MPE XL MPE iX Host Configuration 139 Humidity operating specifications 269 Idle mode setting duration of 122 Ignore DB8 Setup 107 Ignore Character 100 Ignore Dots 104 Ignore Spaces 105 IGP 110 Compatible 106 IGP PGL Emulation 97 Submenu 97 IGP VGL Emulation 102 IGP100 Compatibility 101 ILL EXT BUS ACC message 263 ILL INST ACCSS message 263 ILLGL OPR
93. 8 should be the power up configuration The Power Up Configuration Table 9 Setting The Power Up Configuration Step Key Result Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on Raise the printer cover on cabinet models 2 ON LINE OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 3 a p g ENTER SWITCH fas you to make configuration UNLOCKED cnanggs OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 4 CONFIG CONTROL N Load Config S PS om CONFIG CONTROL Power Up Config 6 Power Up Config NY o 7 Power Up Conti Press until the desired number 4 OR 6 P 9 1 8 displays 8 ENTER PowerUp Config The printer has selected the 6 desired configuration 9 a g ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key LOCKED 10 ON LINE ONLINE 11 Close the printer cover The printer is ready for operation 57 Chapter _3 _ Changing Parameters Deleting Configurations Factory Default CONFIG CONTROL Load Config Save Config Print Config _ Delete Config Power Up Protect Config Configs OAONOaRWND You can delete any of your customized configurations You cannot however delete the configuration 0 which is the factory preset configuration The Protect Configs parameter must be set to disable before you may delete a configuration See page 60 58 Deleting
94. 999 ok 10 221 1 25 root gt set logpath 12 type user job ok user ok job save 239 Chapter 13 LineJet Print Server Naming Schemes Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default Web Browser 1 Using a Web browser direct the browser to URL http LineJetIPaddress destConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 destConf htm1 Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 At the Print Path Configuration HTML form that displays select a destination link e g d1prn from the top of the page to bring up the appropriate destination form 3 Once the desired destination HTML form displays scroll down to the Logpath Type and Logpath Port sections to view the current logpath settings for this particular destination Whether using Telnet or a Web browser you can alter any of these settings at this point and then click on the SUBMIT button to store them into the LineJet Print Server Remember to repower the LineJet Print Server to make the settings take effect LineJet Print Server Naming Schemes 1 0 PORT DESTINATION MODEL LOGPATH diprn m1 SS Me 2 d2prn an d3prn m3 13 240 d4prn M4 l Figure 17 LineJet Print Server Default Names l 4 Interfaces Overvie
95. A form that meets the maximum forms thickness requirement in the print area but which exceeds the maximum thickness at a glue line is considered an unreliable and unpredictable form Staples Staples must be used only in the margin area of the form and must not be in line with the path of the tractor holes Ideally staples are placed in the margins so that they coincide with areas of the form where printing does not occur The figure below shows acceptable and unacceptable ways of fabricating staples Chaff Content Preferred Unacceptable Tie Point Cut Point Direction of Forms Movement 4 Cut Point Tie Point Cut To Tie Ratio A common cut to tie ratio for bond forms is 4 1 that is 80 cut to 20 ties This value is dictated chiefly by the application program under which the form runs Lower cut to tie ratios will yield better form handling but stacking may suffer due to increased stiffness of the perforations Some level of experimentation is required to determine the best cut to tie ratio But remember that a cut to tie ratio that causes a thickness buildup of greater than 0 025 inch 0 635 mm or that creates an evenness variation of greater than 0 003 inch 0 0762 mm will result in an unreliable and unpredictable form Perforation Intersections Whenever a horizontal perforation intersects with a vertical perforation the point of intersection must be a tie point Cut points at such intersections make the form unacce
96. ACCSS message 263 Indicators 29 Installation steps 61 INTAKE FAN FAULT message 263 Interface 23 241 host menu 110 RS 232 serial 248 Interface specifications 271 Interfaces Bi Tronics 244 Centronics parallel 112 IP Address control panel configuration 62 L Latch Data On parameter Centronics 113 LCD language selecting 109 LED status 163 Line printing 26 Line Terminator 78 LineJet Print Server Configuration Windows 150 LineJet Print Server configuration 142 LineJet Print Server Name changing 185 297 LineJet Print Server Naming Scheme 240 LineJet Print Server Security 235 LinePrinter Plus menu 80 Lines Per Minute lpm 27 List Commands 230 LO DRV SHORT message 263 Load Configuration parameter 71 LOAD PAPER message 263 Loading configuration values 54 Loading emulations 74 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX 263 Locking the ENTER key 42 Logging 238 through logpaths 239 Logos creating 25 LP PLUS emulations 74 LPI 104 LPI Adjust 78 Maintenance 251 Manual printing conventions 19 related documents 20 Manual vs Host 172 Maximum Line Width 77 Menu configuration 41 68 MIB 289 Midline PY includes PN 106 Miscellaneous Commands 232 Mode auto reset 29 print quality 24 run 29 models setting a formfeed 181 setting onlcr 181 Monitoring 238 Naming Scheme 240 NDS setup 197 Negotiation phase 245 298 NetWare Version 3 x Novell 188 NetWar
97. AP FIFO OVERFL Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PAP FIFO UNDRFL Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 263 Chapter 15 Diagnosing Problems Table 21 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table continued Displayed Message Explanation Action Required PAP ILLGL ST Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PAP INCMPL ENER Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PAP INVLD CMD Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PAP INVLD PARM Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PAP NOT SCHED Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PAP NT AT SPEED Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PAP UNEXP INT Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PARITY ERROR Parity error serial interface Check your serial host interface parameter settings if necessary adjust them so they match the settings of th
98. CA fimeJot P tinlerd User s Manual CA imeSot P rinlord User s Manual READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER Software License Agreement CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER USING THIS PRINTER INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE AND WRITTEN MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED Definitions Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable data and program The term Software Product includes the Software resident in the printer and its documentation The Software Product is licensed not sold to you and Hewlett Packard either owns or licenses from other vendors who own all copyright trade secret patent and other proprietary rights in the Software Product License 1 Authorized Use You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or personal purposes 2 Restrictions a To protect the proprietary rights of Hewlett Packard you agree to maintain the Software Product and other proprietary information concerning the typefaces in strict confidence b You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software Product c You shall not sublicense sell lease or
99. Check that the function code file is on the computer by listing the contents of the directory where the function code is located Change CD to the directory that contains the function code file On the printer control panel press and hold down the ON LINE FF keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on Continue holding the ON LINE FF keys down for five seconds then release them Wait until you see WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD 10 If you are downloading via the parallel port go to step 13 otherwise press the gt NEXT key SELECT DOWNLOAD PORT DATAPRODUCT appears on the LCD 11 Press gt NEXT again to cycle through the download ports available in the printer DATAPRODUCT parallel CENTRONICS parallel default port RS232 9600 RS 232 serial 9600 baud This is the only rate older versions of DOS can use RS232 19 2K RS 232 serial 19200 baud Loading Code Through The Parallel Or Serial Port RS232 38 4K RS 232 serial 38400 baud RS232 115K RS 232 serial 115000 baud RS422 9600 RS 422 serial 9600 baud RS422 19 2 RS 422 serial 19200 baud RS422 38 4K RS 422 serial 38400 baud RS422 115K RS 422 serial 115000 baud 12 When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD press ENTER WAITING DOWNLOAD PORT lt your selection gt appears on the display 13 Select the download command appropriate to the port being used as follows
100. D 2E 2F 30 3i 32 33 34 35 346 37 89 lt D gt 7 ABCDEFG 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 4i 42 43 44 45 464 47 HI 8 4 4B 49 OD OA 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 BA 2B 2C 2D 0123456789 BE PF 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 SA 3B 3C 3D O27 ABCDEFGHIJKLM 3E SF 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D NOPGRSTUVWXYZE 4E 4F 50 Si S52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 SA SB SC 5D abcdefghijkim 5E 5F 60 l 62 63 64 465 b 67 68 469 6A 6B C 4D noparstuvwxyzt i 6E 6F 70 71i 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D PREZAR H 7E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 70123456789 gt 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 7 ABCDEFGHIU SF 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A OD OA 23 24 he O 4 7 01234 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 56789 i lt gt 7 ABCD 35 34 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D SE 3F 40 41 42 43 44 EFGHIVJKALMNOPQ RST 45 46 47 48 49 44 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 UVWXYZEN I _ abed 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C SD SE SF 60 61 62 63 64 efghijkimnopqrst 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E amp F 70 7i 72 73 74 uvuxyztik 46 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 20 21 22 23 24 25 amp O 012345 26 27 28 29 BA 2B 2C 2D GE 2 F 30 31 32 33 34 35 6789 lt gt 7 ABCDE 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 FGHIUK 4 amp 0 46 47 48 49 4A 4B OD OA 24 25 26 27 28 29 BA 2B 0123456789 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 JA 3B lt gt 7 ABCDEFGHIJK 30 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
101. D SET TOF Q ONLINE FF LF VIEW DOWN ENTER C CO O PEED aC PAGE L ADJ Q Secondary Keys Primary Keys Raise the printer cover to access these keys Pedestal Model l Status Indicator Message Display Up Down Adj a I OnLine FF LF View EELOTHER QOU Prev Next Enter Shift Page L Adj Clear Primary Keys Secondary Keys Raise the printer cover to access these keys Figure 5 The Control Panels 40 OFFLINE CONFIG ACTIVE EMULATION MAINT MISC HOST CONTROL EMULATION INTERFACE page 71 page 73 page 74 page 109 page 110 Load Config PCL II PCL II Hex Dump Mode Bi Tronics Save Config LP PLUS LP PLUS Power up State Centronics Print Config IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL amp LP Display Language Serial Delete Config IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL amp LP 3 Power Stacker Ethernet Power Up Config Protect Configs Auto Switching ETHERNET PRINTER DIAGNOSTICS RIBBON PARAMS CONTROL page 123 MINDER page 120 page 121 page 126 IP Address Unidirectional Printer Tests New Ribbon Gateway Address PMD Fault Test Width Ribbon Action Subnet Mask Slow Paper Slew Paper Out Dots Ribbon Size MAC Address Power Saver Time System Memory Ribbon Adjust Novell Protocol Print Statistics Fault Action NetBIOS Protocol Novell Frame PPM Port
102. Enable 8 Ipi Enable CR After LF Disable Enable CR After FF Disable Enable CR After VT Enable Disable Page L Page L Config Print Symbol Set Reset Cmd Lines Inches Print CFG Ld 66 11 0 inches Power up Config 1 128 2 16 inches Current Config Factory Config Disable Chapter 4 Primary Char set Emulation Menu from previous page Symbol Set Roman 8 8U Turkish 8 8T Arab 8 8V Cyrillic 8R PC858 MtLi 13U MC Text 12J Roman 9 4U Latin 9 9N Win3 0Lat 1 9U Japan Postnet Katakana Post ASCII OU Math Sym 0A 0M LineDraw 0B OL ISO Den Nor 0D Roman Ext 0E ISO UK 1E ISO France 0F ISO German 0G 76 Hebrew 0H Japan ASCII OK Katakana 1K Block Char 1L OCR A 0O OCR B 10 ISO Swe Fin 0S ISO Spain 1S ISO Italian Ol ISO Portugu 4S Latin 1 ON Latin 2 2N Latin 5 5N Latin 6 6N Baltic 19L PC8 DanNor 11U PC8 Cd437 10U PC850 MtLi 12U PC851 LtGk 12G PC852 Lat2 17U PC Turkish 9T PC Hebrew 15H PC Lat Ara 10V PC Cyrillic 3R Win3 1Lat1 19U Win3 1Lat 2 9E Win3 1Lat 5 5T Math 8 8M PS Math 5M Greek 7 12N Postnet4 15Y Postnet11 25 Greek 8 8G Hebrew 8 8H Katakana 8 8K DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 Secondary Char Set from previous page Symbol Set identical to Primary Character Set PCL II Emulation Primary Char se
103. Latin Am II Extended Subset Extended Subset Multinational Code Page 437 Barcode 10 CPI Code Page 850 Mult DP 10 CPI Mult DP 12 CPI ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek 437 Mult LQ 10 CPI Greek Greek DP 10 CPI Greek DP 12 CPI Greek LQ 10 CPI Grap DP 10 CPI Grap LQ 10 CPI Greek 8859 7 PC851 Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G Sci DP 10 CPI LtGk 12G Sci DP 12 CPI Sci LQ 10 CPI 84 P Series Emulation Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 8 or 10 3 LPI Control Code 08 Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 BS You can define the code to output an elongated character or a backspace Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer e CR CR Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Disable Discards any data past the forms
104. MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED Hewlett Packard does not warrant that the functions contained in the Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free Hewlett Packard reserves the right to make changes and or improvements in the Software without notice at any time 2 INNO EVENT WILL HEWLETT PACKARD BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS LOST DATA BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT EVEN IF HEWLETT PACKARD HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 3 Hewlett Packard will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this Agreement 4 Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused solely by our negligence for the Software Product covered by this Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this Agreement 5 California law governs this Agreement Termination of License Agreement
105. Number PPM Port Timeout Ethernet Speed To view options press Down gt Next 4 Prev To select an option press ENTER 1 Choices available are limited to the emulations installed on the printer 2 Appears only if LP Plus is the active emulation To return to main menu press 3 Appears only if installed CLEAR To exit menu press ON LINE Default Setting Figure 6 Configuration Menu Overview 41 Chapter 3 42 Configuring The Printer Operating Modes The printer has two operating modes online and offline When the printer is online it is controlled by the host computer and prints data sent by the host computer When the printer is offline communication with the host is interrupted so you can load paper change ribbons or test and configure the printer Activate configuration settings with the ENTER key which enters your new setting into printer memory An asterisk after a displayed setting shows it is entered into memory If pressing ENTER to select a parameter produces no result press DOWN to move to the next lower level For example if you press ENTER while CONFIG CONTROL Print Config displays nothing will happen because another level exists below this selection Press DOWN and the Current option displays To cycle through the choices Current Factory Power Up etc press the NEXT or PREV keys Press ENTER and the selected configuration will print The Configurations
106. Printer Overview Output Control Depending on the active emulation the printers have the following output control features e Four modes for printing text 1 Correspondence High Density 2 Data Processing DP Standard Density 3 Sparse high speed Sparse Density 4 OCR A and OCRB e Selectable forms length and width e Character attribute specification Selectable pitch normal expanded and compressed Emphasized shadow printing Automatic underlining and overscoring Superscript and subscript printing Sia NS Double high and wide printing e Resident multinational character sets and bar codes Graphics and Vertical Formatting Several graphics and vertical formatting features are available e Built in graphics generators 1 IBM Proprinter Ill XL bit image graphics 2 Epson FX 1050 dot graphics mode 3 P Series Plot 4 PCL raster graphics e Programmable electronic vertical formatting provides rapid vertical paper movement to specified lines for printing repetitive and continuous forms You can choose from the following methods 1 Vertical tabbing in Proprinter III XL and Epson FX emulation modes 2 Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU in P Series emulation mode 3 PCL vertical forms control VFC Built in Diagnostic Tools The following diagnostic tools are provided with the printer e Comprehensive diagnostic self tests permanently stored in the printer e Configuration printout e Data stream hex code prin
107. Server orp is the name of the remote printer on the remote Print Server ob3 declares that the remote Print Server is a BSD type Other useful commands are lpstat and lpmove usr 1lib You can now do a test print lp d Quality etc inetd conf HP UX Typical Configuration Parallel or Serial Attachment Printers set up on HP PB amp CIO computers Table 13 Drivers Required CIO 6 CHANNEL CIO 16 CHANNEL Interface HP PB MUX MUX Serial mux2 mux0 cio_ca0 mux0_16 cio ca0 Parallel Ipr2 N A N A The Drivers shown in this table should be installed in the Kernel Configuration 173 Chapter 9 _ Unix Host Configuration HP UX Configuration Guidelines Within SAM follow the menu Printers and Plotters Printers Plotters Printer Plotter Manager menu select Actions Add Local Printer Plotter Add parallel Printer Plotter or Add serial Printer Plotter If parallel printer is selected Printer Name user s choice Printer Model Interface user s choice Printer Device File Name SAM creates a special file Printer Class user s choice If serial printer is selected The system displays the Serial Interface Hardware Paths Port select a valid port Printer Name user s choice Printer Model Interface user s choice Printer Device File Name SAM creates a special file Printer Class user s choice 174 Printing Setup On Sys V Printing Setup On Sys V This setup involves any Unix op
108. Server tries to login to the file server the passwords are compared To set the password on the Novell host for use ina PSERVER setup you will need to complete the steps as follows Netware 4 x 1 Log in to NetWare Administrator as a user with security equal to Admin on your Novell host 2 Double click on the print server object you are using for your setup This will bring up the print server objects details pages 3 Select the Change Password button on the Identification page At the prompts type and re type the new password Press OK when you are finished 5 Proceed to the next section to store the password on the LineJet Print Server Netware 3 x Enter PCONSOLE as supervisor on your Novell host Select Print Server Information from the main menu Select the appropriate printer and press ENTER Select Change Password SV Oo Nes At the prompts type and re type the new password Press ENTER when you are finished 6 Proceed to the next section to store the password on the LineJet Print Server Print Server Setup HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http LineJet IPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and u press ENTER at the password prompt since there
109. To test this you can 1 telnet to the print server e g telnet 192 75 11 9 and log in as root 2 Enterthe command start fox prn 3 Execute stop prn right after starting the test This test will send the same text line over and over to the attached printer e Is the job getting stuck in the Unix host queue If so check that the printer is online If it is there is a configuration error on the Unix station so creating a new print setup may be needed e Is the control panel showing any activity to indicate it is receiving data If so but there is nothing printing check to see if a manual form feed is needed Also ensure that the printer can support the type of job coming through e Do all jobs fail or just certain ones For example is it possible that jobs from a certain application are the only ones to fail If so check the type of data it sends to make sure it matches the printer emulation Check the application printer configuration for mistakes e Ifyou are using System V was the spooler restarted 180 Stair stepped Output Stair stepped Output Stair stepped output is print which starts at the top left of the page but every line thereafter starts a little further over to the right It also refers to Unix jobs that print one line of text at the top of a page followed by a series of blank pages This kind of output happens only with Unix text jobs if carriage return insertion is not incorporated into the print set
110. XQ Emulation P Series XQ Emulation Printer Factory Default Protocol from page 80 P Series XQ Control Code Define CR Auto LF Define LF Compressed Elong Alt 06 Code Code Print Font 6 0 LPI CR CR Disable LF CR LF char01SOH Elng BS Font SO 8 0 LPI CR CR LF_ Enable LF LF char 03 ETX Elng SO Font BS 10 3 LPI char 09 HT HS Print EVFU Select Upr Case Slew Select Relative char 02 STX Enable Disable 1 to 16 lines char 03 ETX Disable Enable 1 to 15 lines char 09 HT Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 8 or 10 3 LPI Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer e CR CR Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Disable Discards
111. a single mouse click and use a virtual operator s panel to configure printers in the same room or on the other side of the world Telnet A TCP IP command that helps configure LineJet Print Server settings remotely A TCP IP host starts a Telnet session with the print server and logs in to the device command shell to alter and view settings Example telnet 192 75 11 9 Remote Shell A TCP IP command that helps configure print server settings remotely A TCP IP host uses this command to remotely execute a single command on the LineJet Print Server Example rsh spike list prn This command remotely executes the nosh command list prn on the LineJet Print Server named spike Configuration Using a Web Browser The LineJet Print Server settings can be configured over TCP IP through a standard Web browser The LineJet Print Server Web pages provide a handy way to access some of the commands built into the print server You can access online help for all HTML pages Note If a router is used make sure a gateway value is configured To access the LineJet Print Server home page 1 Make sure the print server has an IP address and subnet mask so it is recognizable on your TCP IP network 64 Configuration Alternatives Make sure your network station can successfully ping the LineJet Print Server over the network Direct your Web browser to the Uniform Resource Locator URL http IPaddress e g http 192 75 11 9
112. address can be obtained by using the LineJet printer diagnostic print test E Net Test Page or by using the printer control panel to view the MAC Address value in the ETHERNET PARAMS configuration submenu displayed on page 120 In addition a label attached to the rear of the printer will show the MAC address which reads 00 80 72 XX yy ZZ 3 Configure the printer so the active emulation is PCL PCL PGL or PCL VGL depending on your printer software This configuration should also be set as the printer s power up configuration 4 Log in to the LineJet Print Server using a telnet session You can use telnet on your HP e3000 or another workstation with TCP IP installed such as Windows etc or via a web browser session Use the following commands to establish a reverse communication channel for PJL to function a telnet xxx xxx xxx xxx Or telnet host_name example telnet 192 192 192 192 or telnet LineJet1 Note The telnet host_name command will only work if the host s table entry with the xxx xxx xxx xxx format has been defined in the host file of the K HP e3000 b log in as user name root no password or by using the user name and password you may have stored in the adapter 140 c set dest dlprn backchannel prn save list dest this will allow you to see your change exit 5 The npconfig file is read each time the printer commands spooler nn start or startspool nn are used meaning if corrections are neede
113. age does not appear it was a false indication and no further attention is required 2 If the message reappears press the CLEAR key If the message goes away it was a false indication and no further attention is required If the message reappears call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer Table 21 explains the fault messages and offers solutions where possible 259 Chapter 15 Diagnosing Problems Table 21 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Explanation Action Required 8 5V PWR FAIL Internal power failure Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 15V PWR FAIL Controller voltage failure Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 23 5V PWR FAIL Controller voltage failure Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 48V PWR FAIL Internal power failure Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer A TO D OVERUN Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ACCESS NULL PTR Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer BUFFER OVERRUN Host sends data after the printer buffer is full Serial interface Check your serial host interface parameter settings if necessary adjust them so they match the settings of the attached host CLEAR PAPER JAM No paper
114. al QMS Code V Printronix emulation This graphics programming language allows the user to create and store forms generate logos bar codes and expanded characters create other graphics and merge graphics with alphanumeric data as a document is printed e LineJet Printers IGP PGL Technical Reference Manual Explains how to write graphics programs using the optional PGL Printronix IGP emulation This graphics programming language allows the user to create and store forms generate logos bar codes and expanded characters create graphic images and merge graphics with alphanumeric data as a document is printed 20 The LineJet Printer Family Printer Overview The LineJet Printer Family The LineJet series of line matrix printers consists of 500 1000 and 1500 lines per minute lpm models packaged in various configurations All of the models offer software versatility and the latest refinements in line matrix printing technology The model numbers indicate printing speed and physical configuration Table 1 The LineJet Printer Family Serial Serial Model Nameplate Erini Pedestal Cabinet Parallel Ethernet Power Number Speed Stacker Interface Interface C3201D LineJet 500P 500 Ipm v v C3202D LineJet500Q 500 Ipm v v C3204D LineJet 1000Q 1000 lpm v C3205D LineJet 1500Q 1500 Ipm v C5640D LineJet 1500Q 1500 Ipm v v Most line matrix print
115. al interface When a framing error occurs an exclamation point is printed If 20 successive errors are received a line feed is added to force printing to occur Overrun Error Handling Overrun error checking is always in effect for the serial interface When a data overrun error occurs an asterisk is printed If 20 successive errors are received a line feed is added to force printing to occur RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interface Configuration By using the control panel you can verify and change several interface parameters in order to meet specific application requirements Refer to Serial Submenu on page 114 for RS 232 and RS 422 parameter descriptions and information on selecting values for the following parameters RS 232 and RS 422 e Baud Rate data rate selected from the operator panel e Data Bits 7 or 8 Bits e Stop Bits 1 or 2 Bits e Parity None Odd Even Mark or Sense RS 232 only e Data Terminal Ready logic e Request to Send logic Some application programs require a unique configuration If the printer is not working properly with the configuration you selected contact a Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 1 5 Routine Service And Diagnostics Routine Service Periodic cleaning ensures efficient operation and clear print quality and it is the only maintenance your printer requires If the printer is located in a dusty area or is used for heavy duty printing clean it more
116. and management are e Agent manager model e MIB the management information database e SNMP the protocol used to get management information Agent Manager Model The elements of a monitoring system MIB and SNMP are implemented in an agent manager model e The manager is a console workstation or server on working hubs or routers which has a global knowledge of LineJet Print Servers and printers OpenView is a management console e Agents are utilities that reside on devices such as a LineJet Print Server that respond through SNMP to management requests for information The information is stored in a MIB Management Information Base MIB A MIB is a Management Information Base that contains information a device makes available to SNMP The MIB describes information about actual objects to be managed controlled and viewed There are many different MIBs defined Standards of Network Printer MIBs The Printer MIB contained in the LineJet Print Server is based on the following standards e System and Interfaces Group MIB RFC 1213 of March 1991 e Host Resource MIB RFC 1514 of September 1993 e Printer MIB RFC 1759 of March 1995 289 Appendix D _ Implementing Printer Management 290 Components of the Printer MIB The printer MIB gives the network manager access to most of the information that is normally accessible through the NIC command set for configuring the server with SNMP Some objects identified by thi
117. another TCP IP host specified by host IPaddress on the LineJet Print Server network datasize is the datagram packet size which defaults to 64 bytes if no size is included in the syntax and packetnumber is the number of requests to be sent Note To use a host or IP name instead of the address you must have set the l DNS server on the LineJet Print Server Use the command set sysinfo 2 dns todo this 233 Chapter 12 Complete Command List telnet hostIPaddress escapecharacter telnet 192 75 11 35 Start a Telnet session with another TCP IP host specified by hostIPaddress on the LineJet Print Server network If escapecharacter is used it resets the key sequence used to exit the Telnet session It will return you to the telnet gt prompt where you can execute quit Use the keycode command to find out exact escape characters if needed The default character is CTRL To use a host or IP name instead of the address you must have set the DNS server on the LineJet Print Server Use the command set sysinfo dns todo this 234 chr string Echo string or redirect string to an I O port using chr string gt ioport keycode Determine the hexadecimal value for a key to be used as the escape character with the LineJet Print Server built in telnet command 1 3 Extra Features LineJet Print Server Security There are TCP access lists available to restrict host connections with the device Users And Passwords
118. art in Appendix C The printer must be offline for testing Allows you to make configuration changes Cycle through the choices An asterisk indicates this choice is active Locks the ENTER key LOCKED I onini ONLINE 18 Go to the host computer and send a file The printer outputs a hex dump Refer to the 19 When the hex dump is complete change the Hex Dump Mode back to Disable by following the steps outlined above and selecting Disable 258 Fault Messages Fault Messages If a fault condition occurs in the printer the status indicator on the control panel flashes on and off and the message display indicates the specific fault Fault messages are summarized in Table 21 Displayed faults fall into one of two categories e Operator correctable e Field service required For operator correctable faults follow the suggested corrective action in the fault message description After correcting the displayed fault press the CLEAR key to clear the error message and status indicator and resume printing If the fault message reappears contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention For faults that require field service do two things to try to clear the fault before calling your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 1 Set the printer power switch to O off wait 15 seconds then turn the printer on again Run your print job again If the mess
119. ble IGP110 Compatbl Disable Enable SFCC amp Pwrup This option has several suboptions which define the SFCC and power up configuration used with Code V SFCC This option selects the Special Function Control Code The default value is the caret decimal 94 Valid values are 17 through 255 Throughout this section the is used as the SFCC Run a configuration printout to determine the currently selected SFCC Ignore Mode Disable The default Enable Selects the ignore mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default All characters are ignored until a A command is received 103 Chapter 4 104 Emulation Menu Free Format e Disable The default e Enable Selects free format mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default Free format causes the Code V to ignore carriage returns line feeds and all characters below hex 20 sent from the host Mgnum Conversion e Disable The default e Enable Selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default LPI The number of lines to be printed per inch For example at 6 Ipi there is 1 6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line Graphics Options Following are several options which configure printing output Slashes in Zeros This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character s
120. bout two minutes During that time you will not be able to change any printer settings from the control panel If you attempt to do so the message Please Wait E NET INIT will appear When the initialization is complete the message E NET READY will display and you may then change any PrintNet or other printer configuration options from the control panel You can set any of three listed parameters from the printer control panel These parameters are located in the ETHERNET PARAMS menu The available parameters are e IP Address e Gateway Address e Subnet Mask The procedure for changing any of the parameters is the same The procedure for changing the IP Address is given here as an example Use the same procedure for the other required parameters To change the IP Address parameter 1 Make sure the printer is on and raise the printer cover 2 Press the ON LINE key to place the printer in the OFFLINE mode 3 Unlock the ENTER key For instructions refer to Locking And Unlocking The ENTER Key on page 42 4 Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key until the LCD displays ETHERNET PARAMS Press the DOWN arrow key to access the IP Address parameter Press the DOWN arrow key to view the current IP Address Press the DOWN arrow key to access the portion of the IP Address to be changed 62 Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel 8 Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to select the portion of the IP
121. cal Port A o gt Local Port Ki Local Port a f Local Port Local Port HP LaserJet 4 Atthe next window click on Add Port Printer Ports Digital Network Port HP JetDirect Port Lexmark DLC Network Port Lexmark TCP IP Network Port Local Port LPR Part Printronix TCP IP Printer Port 5 Double click on LPR Port If LPR Port is not listed it means that Microsoft TCP IP Printing service is not installed 155 Chapter 8 _ Windows Host Configuration Add LPR compatible printer PrintNet_IP_Address 6 Inthe Name or address of server providing pd box enter the IP address of the LineJet Print Server adapter In the Name of printer or print queue on that server box enter dlprn Add Printer Wizard ey Generic IBM Graphics Spin Generic IBM Graphics Spin wide 7 Select the Generic Text only printer driver or install the LineJet printer driver The generic driver is good for troubleshooting installation problems The network administrator can always go back and install the LineJet printer driver at a later time If you have the LineJet Utility CD and you want to install the LineJet printer driver click on Have Disk 156 8 Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup Install From Disk La cA E drivers winnt_4 v In the Copy manufacturer s files from box enter the path to the LineJet Utility CD printer dri
122. cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeneneees 219 Complete Command List ccccececeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeessaeeeteneeesaes 220 Store COMMANAS cecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseeeeeeeens 220 Set Commands isei easa earan aiia a aada a aiias 223 List COMMAMNAS iieii arapa taai iaa aa aa aae aan ade 230 Debug Commands cccccccceeeeeneeececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenaeeteaes 231 Miscellaneous Commands ceecececccce ee eeeeceeseseaeeeeeeeeeaeaneseees 232 Table of Contents 13 Extra Features seeccscraasisacedecavinuhvenaawssonaaddooesynnas 235 LineJet Print Server Security 00 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteaeeteeeees 235 Users And Passwords iscsi dota caheietentan 235 TOR ACCESS LISTS ei iiia a aa pend aAa EERE 237 Printer Monitoring And Logging ecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaes 238 Printer And Print Job Monitoring seesssesessesssresseeerrssrernssreenss 238 Printer Logging Through LogpathS ssssesssssseesserrssseernssreens 239 LineJet Print Server Naming SCheMeS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeneeees 240 14 Interfaces vcusiunaseneccesssasineielisiarttanhoaa cuties 241 OVERVIOW aodare cay ee araa aaa eed raaa Glebe ebtslaeeed iv AE ANAA EEA 241 Centronics Parallel Interface ccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 242 Centronics Interface Signals ccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 242 Centronics Parallel Interfac
123. ce signals 242 Centronics menu Buffer Size in K 113 Busy on Strobe 113 Data Bit 8 112 Data Polarity 113 293 Latch Data On 113 Prime Signal 113 Response Polarity 113 Centronics parallel interface configuration menu 112 configuring 112 Changing LineJet Print Server name 185 parameters 48 Character attributes 24 Character Set 86 88 90 93 ASCII 287 CLEAR PAPER JAM message 260 Clear to send CTS signal RS 232 serial interface 249 Clearing error log 124 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH 260 263 CLOSE PLATEN message 260 Code V 25 COIL HOT 260 Command 219 complete list 220 getting help 219 Command Prefixes 220 Command Shell 219 ways to access 64 Commands debug 231 list 230 miscellaneous 232 set 223 store 220 Communicating Unix 171 Windows 151 Communication bidirectional 244 Compatibility mode 244 Compressed CPI 100 Compressed Print 96 Configuration Centronics parallel interface 243 changing parameters 48 294 deleting 58 description 61 factory default values 44 loading configuration values 54 menu top level 41 68 70 menus 70 parameters locking 42 power up selection 56 printout 52 protecting 60 RS 232 serial interface 250 RS 422 serial interface 250 saving 50 saving parameters 43 types of 42 Configuration Control menu 71 Configuration menus Centronics Parallel 112 Configuration Printout 79 Configuring printer 39 Connection
124. ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeesaeesseneeetees 117 Auto Switching Submenu ccecceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeeesaeeeeeeeeeas 118 Ethernet Params Menu cc cccceessenceeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeneeees 120 Printer Control M Nu 2 c cccceeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeesaaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeneeeee 121 DiaQnosticS Menu ceceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeneeaaes 123 RIBDONMING Or meae E E sa densi AE A A EEA E ee eens 126 Table of Contents 5 Approaches To Network Printing 129 OVGIVIOW i jecciakit daddies i ak ea Bite ates 129 Peer To Peer Networks ceccceeeseececeeeeeeeeeeenseneeeeeeneneeeeeenennees 129 Print JOD S rvels ceccccecesceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaaeseeaaeeseeeeessaeeeseneeesaas 130 6 TCP IP Configuration seeen 131 TCP IP LineJet Print Server Configuration ssesseeeeseeeeseeeeeeereeen 131 Before You Begin ssnin sae e a A A 131 Creating AliaS S ccccceccceeesseeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeceeeseaeenennees 132 Methods For Setting TCP IP Values c ceceeeeeeeeeessteeeeneeees 133 ASSIQN TCP IP Value S aderido aran ens ana naaie 134 Usg BOOTE a a e e a A a a aia 137 7 HP e3000 LineJet Print Server Configuration 139 OVEIVICW tanid Tiatia aa oa dn a i ee ond OA 139 HP e3000 MPE XL MPE iX Host Configuration 0 0 139 LineJet Print Server Configuration Verification ccceeeeeeee 142 Methods Of
125. ches Face CPI Delay Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line e Enable Different font densities can be used on the same line e Disable Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line Graphics Density Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI the default or 70 DPI Perforation Skip e Disable Allows printing on page perforation e Enable You may set up a skip over margin For example a skip over margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page 77 Chapter 4 LINE 2 Linefeed LINE 2 Linefeed Emulation Menu Display Functns e Disable The default Control characters are not printed e Enable Control characters are printed before they get executed This is a useful debugging tool Line Terminator You can specify what will be used to indicate the end of a line Four options are available LF after CR CR after LF CR after FF and CR after VT Each of these options may be enabled or disabled independent of one another PTX Linefeed e Disable The default Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the bottom of the graphics or barcode thereby disrupting the vertical text alignment e Enable The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top of Form position thereby retaining vertical text alignment When printing graphics or bar codes you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter to Enable to maintain text alignment PTX Linefeed Enabled
126. configured to service the appropriate queue e Is the LineJet Print Server configured as the queue s Currently Attached Server If not make sure you have associated the queue and the printer See Novell Host Configuration on page 186 e Is there a hold on the print job If you select the job from PCONSOLE s CURRENT PRINT JOB ENTRIES change the User Hold or Operator Hold to No e If you look in PCONSOLE s CURRENT QUEUE STATUS within the PRINT QUEUE INFORMATION menu is the server configured to service entries in this queue It is possible to turn servicing off here If you have followed the suggestions above and are still having printing problems try rebooting the LineJet Print Server Then either review every step you took when configuring the LineJet Print Server or try re doing the setup paying special attention to each step explained in Novell Host Configuration on page 186 The job prints incorrectly This category can be broken down into several sub categories such as lost characters garbled data extra banner pages or blank pages at the end of the job However the reason for these mishaps can generally be traced to the printing mechanism used on your Novell system These points should be considered when configuring your print method e g CAPTURE NPRINT etc e Did you include the No Tabs option e Did you specify No Banner with PostScript printers Printing Related e Did you
127. contains customized setup strings to specify the printer operating mode for this logical device This file must be an unnumbered file When no setup file is specified the default MPE iX environment or the global setup file is applied at print time to the printer The spooler will send the contents of the setup file even if it is empty which overrides its own default initialization So for example if you want the pitch to be determined by the printer s front panel setting e g CPI 10 etc set the setup_file to an empty file 7 Whenever any parameters are changed PCL II Host Interface etc the configuration must be saved Then the saved configuration must be designated as the Power Up Configuration If this step is not performed the printer will revert to the factory default configuration at power up parallel I F not Ethernet and communication with the host would become non functional As we have changed some configuration values in this procedure Host Interface Buffer size you must save this configuration to a numbered location 1 8 and designate that configuration as the power up configuration Failure to save and designate the saved configuration as the desired power up configuration will result in problems such as loss of communication after powering off on the printer 144 Method 1 Methods Of Adjusting Paper Position When the HP e3000 spooler is active and the paper needs to be adjusted the print is to
128. correct The TCP IP print device LPD server does not support the test command The specified TCP IP print device is not available If the information typed in the previous screen is correct you can ignore this message Click OK to continue or click Cancel to return to the previous screen and verify settings Cancel The Ethernet cable is not plugged in or the printer is not turned on This message is a communication failure between the NT server and the LineJet Print Server card Check cabling IP address settings gateway etc e Test page does not print or prints incorrectly 1 Is the printer online Re send test page 2 The print queue name in step 6 should be d1prn however the name can be changed To verify the queue names print an Ethernet Test Page 3 The Printronix NT print driver requires P Series emulation active on the printer The Generic Text driver should print in any printer emulation 4 Delete then re install Microsoft TCP IP Print service on the server 167 Chapter 8 _ Windows Troubleshooting Tips 168 9 Unix Configuration Overview This chapter details a complete Unix setup including 1 Configuring the LineJet Print Server with its mandatory TCP IP settings i e IP address and subnet mask 2 Configuring the Unix host station with a new printer 169 Chapter _9 _ Unix Environment Description Unix Environment Description The LineJet Print Server supports network print
129. ction of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer e CR CR Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return 87 Chapter 4 88 Emulation Menu Auto LF This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width Define LF Code e LF LLF Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e LF CR LF Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received The next print position is print position 1 of the next line FF valid at TOF e Enable Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form e Disable Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the menu To use one of these sets choose
130. d to the file it is not necessary to restart the HP e3000 only the spooler Stop the spooler by using a stopspool command then restart it using one of the commands described above Create or modify the npconfig file As a starting point you can use the system file npconfig samp For each logical network printer that points to a physical LineJet Print Server using the npconfig file entries make the following minimum entries assume a logical device 201 has been set in sysgen 201 network_address xxx xXxXxX XXX XXX tcp_port_number 9100 pjl_supported true snmp_enabled false jam_recovery false data_timeout 30 The entry snmp_enabled false must be entered as shown If you have other HP LaserJet printers already configured while using a global setup_file entry and you experience font or other difficulties with the LineJet line matrix printers create a separate setup file which is empty to override the global entries This may be required since the LineJet printer uses PCL Level II which is a minimal set of PCL and the typical HP e3000 global setup file may contain PCL commands beyond those in PCL II This will not affect your ability to use the LineJet printer effectively The syntax for the setup file is setup_file name Use npconfig entries banner_header and banner_trailer for banner or trailer pages Be aware that the default value is true so banners will print by default 141 Chapter 7 _LineJet Pr
131. dows 3 1 and Printronix Printing System PPS new printer setups Windows NT 3 51 Host Setup To configure a new printer on a Windows NT 3 51 station 1 2 3 Open the Control Panel Double click on Printers Select Create a Printer from the Printer menu to display the dialogue box in Figure 12 Create Printer Printer Name Driver Accel a Writer 8200 v2014 103 Description Print to LPT1 CO Share this printer on the network Share Name Location Figure 12 Create a Printer Dialogue Box Define a name to represent this print setup and select the appropriate driver for the printer that will be used in this setup For printer driver choose generic text or Epson FX1050 or Proprinter based on print need Under the Print To field select Other Select LPR Port from the list that displays and click OK to bring up a dialogue box similar to the one found in Figure 13 Add LPH compathtie pris es Hama m miba of mrw poring i Meee of p nde on pint queue os thal sere Figure 13 Add LPR Compatible Printer Dialogue Box 7 Type in the IP address or host name of the LineJet Print Server in the first field 153 Chapter 8 _ Windows Host Configuration 8 Type in the name of a pre defined destination queue on the LineJet Print Server in the second field Note i This name must be a name of an existing desti
132. ds to restart the printer must be power cycled e g after the jam This is different from the way it may work with other HP printers that support PLR and use an internal JetDirect interface This is also different from the way it works with the C256X printers that use the HP IB interface This caveat may be one of the reasons it appears that PLR does not work for LineJet printers Note that printing will start with the page following the last one printed Restarting at the point of interruption when a particular spool file is reprinted after being interrupted previously by a command In this case a spool file is reprinted after being interrupted by a command such as spoolf 0 nnn defer For LineJet printers when the spool file is undeferred after being interrupted with the deferred option a silent run PLR will occur up until the page following the last one printed A spool file can also be interrupted with the spooler ldev stop command but this command should be avoided for a LineJet printer connected to the network with the JetDirect EX or internal Print Server interface This is due to network printing problems with stopping mid file server 147 Chapter 7 HP e3000 MPE XL MPE iX DTC Configuration HP e3000 MPE XL MPE iX DTC Configuration MPE XL MPE iX Typical Configuration Within NMMGR follow the menu Open Config DTS Go to Profiles Add or Modify Printer Type 22 21 22 or 26 or P
133. e Method shipped Required C320xD D printers using ONLINE ETHERNET PCL II or 356351 exe Via Network 4 MB Flash C5640D PCL II emulation ONLINE ETHERNET LP Note 4 Note 1 4 MB DRAM Note 1 D printers using ONLINE ETHERNET LP or 356353 exe Via Network 4 MB Flash VGL emulation ONLINE E NET CODE V PCL Note 4 Note 1 4 MB DRAM D printers using ONLINE ETHERNET PGL LP or 356352 exe Via Network 4 MB Flash PGL emulation ONLINE ETHERNET PCL II Note 4 Note 1 4 MB DRAM NOTES 7 ONLINE SERL PCL II or ONLINE SERL LP PLUS if serial port is the selected host interface 1 If the internal network card is not installed or was removed download via the parallel or serial port If the printer Function Code is downloaded with the LineJet Print Server removed or a LineJet Print Server is added to the printer after downloading the Ethernet port will not function with LineJet Printer Manager In this case do the following 1 Press the up down right left arrow keys simultaneously Printer displays FACTORY Printer Management 2 Press the down arrow key Printer displays Diagnostic Port 3 Press the down arrow key Printer displays Debug Serial 4 Press the right arrow key Printer displays Debug Ethernet 5 Press ENTER Printer displays Debug Ethernet Press ONLINE to exit 2 On an HP3000 MPE host system if Page Level Recovery functionality is desired the printer must be upgraded with the
134. e Disable Enable Disable 15 60 Min Enable Disable Enable Instant Note Once you change active emulations any changes to the previously l selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved Table 5 Parameter Change Example Procedure Step Key Result Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on Raise the printer cover on cabinet models 2 ON LINE OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 48 Example Table 5 Parameter Change Example Procedure continued Step Key Result Notes 3 ace 4 D UNTIL 5 SSF 6 QS 7 4 o N 8 ENTER ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL OFFLINE PRINTER CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL Unidirectional Unidirectional Disable Unidirectional Enable Unidirectional Enable Allows you to make configuration changes Cycle through the choices An asterisk indicates this choice is active TO SAVE YOUR CHANGES AS A CONFIGURATION THAT IS STORED IN MEMORY 1 a UNTIL 2 m UNTIL OFFLINE PRINTER CONTROL OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 3 Go to the CONFIG CONTROL submenu Save Config option as described on page 51 TO USE THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT SAVING i AA w ENTER SWITCH LOCKED 2 ON LINE ONLINE 3 On cabinet models close the printer cover The printer is
135. e System terminators following a graphics command are sent to the printer and result in paper motion UPC Descenders e Disable UPC EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data e Enable UPC EAN bar codes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data Rot Char Size e Adjusted Rotated clockwise counterclockwise expanded characters have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size parameters e Not Adjusted Rotated expanded characters will be the same size as unrotated characters with the same size parameters Ignore Spaces Disable Trailing spaces are not deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass e Enable Trailing spaces are deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass 105 Chapter 4 106 Emulation Menu Midline PY includes PN e Disable The Graphics mode Enable command PY must be the first three characters of a line e Enable The PY or PN can occur anywhere in a line Convert to U C e Disable Lowercase characters are printed normally e Enable All lowercase alphabetic characters are converted to uppercase Absorb After PN e Disable All line terminators that immediately follow the PN command are sent to the printer and processed e Enable All line terminators that immediately follow the PN command are ignored IGP110 Compatbl This option instructs the Code V to behav
136. e attached host PLAT INV CMD Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PLAT INV PARM Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PLAT INV STATE Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer POWER SAVER MODE Status message printer is in low energy idle state all fans and higher voltages are off only 5Vdc logic circuits are active None POWER SUPPLY HOT Circuits are overheating on the power supply board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PRINTER HOT Controller board sensors report high temperatures on the board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PROTECTED INSTR Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PWR SUPP VOLT Power supply failed Replace power supply board 264 Fault Messages Table 21 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table continued Displayed Message Explanation Action Required RESETTING The printer finished loading the None PLEASE WAIT program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself RESTORING Normal download initialization None BOOT CODE message RIB INVLD CMD Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact
137. e overlay data is only printed with the first form and not on subsequent forms and each form is printed on a separate page UPC Descenders This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders when human readable data is not presented in the UPC EAN bar codes e Enable UPC EAN bar codes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data e Disable UPC EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data Compressed CPI This parameter allows you to choose a compressed character 60 shorter for 17 or 20 CPI instead of the normal height character Disable The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 CPI font e Enable Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 CPI font Ignore Char Ignore Mode This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under the Select Character menu e Disable The PGL does not ignore any characters e Enable The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select Character menu Select Character Instructs the PGL which decimal character 0 255 to ignore from the host IGP PGL Emulation IGP100 Compatbl This option instructs the IGP PGL to behave similarly to the GP 100 with respect to certain commands All new users with new applications should select the Disable option Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual e Disable The IGP does not emulate the IGP 100 mode e Enable The IGP emulat
138. e Configuration cccceeeeee 243 Bi Tronics Parallel Interface eee ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeaas 244 Operating Modes es irna i sive Sidi teeee das aniei narani ka geeaeeiereeivect sete 244 The Negotiation Phase eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeseaaes 245 Sidnals 2 ssei eee Meet eli eee 245 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeees 248 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interface Signals ceeeeee 249 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interface Protocol 0cceeeeee 249 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interface Error Handling 250 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interface Configuration 0 250 15 Routine Service And Diagnostics 251 ROUTING Seic ie itis i Sead is Aen die aie ie We eee 251 Exterior Cleanings ics ccscccpsctecenesseececccuvecndoecgetesacccfessnedecsuePeebecveanes 251 Interior ClEANING ceecececeeceeeeeececeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeseeeeeessaeeeteneeesaes 251 Diagnosing Problemi nesses ast ein eee A 255 Printer Self Tests ccccccsesesceeceneeeeeaeeceeeeeeesaeeeseeeeesaeesteneeeeaees 255 Printing A Hex DUMP cererea irrien ei aAa E 257 Fault Massages icccetedeutehectete e EA E 259 A Printer Specifications And Regulatory Informatio ass eaa a A i 267 Ribbon Specifications cccceeeccececeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeseaaeeeeeeesecaeeeeaeeees 267 Printer Dimension Siani a Na G e hens 269 Environmental Characteristic
139. e LineJet Utilities CD shipped with the printer or using the file transfer protocol ftp procedure described on page 36 Table 4 LineJet Printer LP Series Function Code Chart Control Panel Displays Downoad Download Minimum Model Description toe ys File as Flash DRAM Emulation in Use Method shipped Required C320xA A B printers ONLINE PCL II or 159711 exe Parallel or 1 MB Flash C320xB using PCL II ONLINE LP PLUS Note 2 Serial Port 2 MB DRAM C5640B emulation A B printers ONLINE PCL II VGL 159713 exe Parallel or 2 MB Flash using VGL Note 2 Serial Port 2 MB DRAM emulation A B printers ONLINE LP PLUS PGL 159712 exe Parallel or 2 MB Flash using PGL Note 2 Serial Port 2 MB DRAM emulation C320xC C printers using ONLINE PARL PCL II or 353218 exe Parallel or 4 MB Flash C5640C PCL II emulation ONLINE PARL LP PLUS Notes 3 and 4 Serial Port 4 MB DRAM C printers using ONLINE PARL PCL II VGL 353220 exe Parallel or 4 MB Flash VGL emulation Notes 3 and 4 Serial Port 4 MB DRAM C printers using ONLINE PARL LP PLUS PGL 353219 exe Parallel or 4 MB Flash PGL emulation Notes 3 and 4 Serial Port 4 MB DRAM 32 Preparation For Downloading Table 4 LineJet Printer LP Series Function Code Chart Control Panel Displays Pownload Download Minimum Model Description Se ys File as Flash DRAM Emulation in Us
140. e Version 4 x Novell 189 191 network connectors 61 Network printing overview 129 New Ribbon 127 Nibble mode 244 Novell environments 184 Host Configuration 186 LineJet Print Server configuration 184 NetWare 3 x configuration 186 NetWare Version 3 x 188 NetWare Version 4 x 189 191 Novell 4 x troubleshooting 194 Novell Protocols 120 NPRINTER overview 186 npsh exe 190 Offpage Errors 107 onlcr 181 Online signal 243 Operating modes 42 Operating state upon power up configuring 109 Optimized Ratio 101 Optional emulations 74 Output control 24 Overrun error handling 250 Overstrike 85 93 Overwriting an existing configuration 72 P Page Format 82 Page Length Adjust Inches 79 Page Length Adjust Lines 78 Page Length Representation 77 Page Level Recovery PLR 146 PAP BAD TABLE message 263 PAP BSY TOO LNG message 263 PAP FIFO OVERFL message 263 PAP FIFO UNDRFL message 263 PAP ILLGL ST message 264 PAP INCMPL ENER message 264 PAP INVLD CMD message 264 PAP INVLD PARM message 264 PAP NOT SCHED message 264 PAP NT AT SPEED message 264 PAP UNEXP INT message 264 Paper jams 260 Paper empty PE signal 243 Paper instruction PI signal 243 Paper motion detection 122 Paper out condition specifying last line of text 125 Paper Out Dots parameter 125 Paperout adjust test 124 Parallel interface submenu Centronics 112 Parameters changing 48 locking 42
141. e emulation through the printer s front panel see the submenu below and the parameter descriptions that follow Factory Default EMULATION from page 74 IGP VGL CODE V amp LP SFCC amp LPI Graphics Error Ignore DB8 Pwrup Options Handling Setup Control Char 6 see next page Error Msgs Ignore Nulls 94 17 255 7 Enable Disable Ignore Mode 8 Disable Enable Disable 9 Error Markers Data Bit 8 Enable 10 Enable Enable Free Format Disable Disable Disable Offpage Errors Enable Disable Mgnum Conversion Enable Disable Barcode Errors Enable Enable Disable ISO Char Set PI Control 0 Printer Pl 0 10 Disable Enable Host Pl Disable Enable Max PI 16 Enable Disable 102 Graphics Options from page 102 IGP VGL Code V Emulation Factory Default Slashes in Ignore Dots Append Truncate True Vert Absorb After Zeros Rotated Alpha 1 10 APY Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable Absorb All Disable Enable Enable Disable Enable Disable Absorb Motion UPC Rot Char Ignore Midline PY Convert to Absorb After Descenders Size Spaces U C PN Disable Adjusted Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Not Adjusted Enable Enable Enable Ena
142. e must be selected from the HOST INTERFACE menu in the printer The currently selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control panel message display Each interface has its own submenu with the set of associated interface parameters that you may configure The host interface and its associated parameters control the interface between the printer and your host computer Descriptions follow for each of the host interface submenus 110 Bi Tronics Submenu Bi Tronics Submenu Note The Bi Tronics parameters in the printer must be set the same as the interface in the host computer at the other end of the data cable of the printer Otherwise the printer might not work online and data characters from the computer might not print or might print as garbled text Factory Default Bi Tronics from page 110 Prime Signal TOF Action Buffer Size in K Disable Reset 1 Enable Do Nothing 1 16 Prime Signal e Disable The parallel port does not perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal e Enable The parallel port performs a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal TOF Action e Reset A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host This setting is used only if the Prime Signal parameter is enabled Do Nothing No form feed is performed on reset Buffer Size
143. e power the printer to make the new settings take effect Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the appropriate printer is being serviced The printer should display a message such as Waiting for job At this point the LineJet Print Server knows to receive any jobs this PSERVER NLM has to send to it through the defined printer Troubleshooting 10 100Base T PSERVER Setup If there is no connection with the LineJet Print Server after you have completed the print setup there are several things to confirm Note The debug information that is mentioned in this section can be found by either telneting to the LineJet Print Server and issuing the commands given or by launching a browser to the Novell status page on the LineJet Print Server e g http 192 168 11 9 networkNovellStatus html Have you tried repowering the LineJet Print Server Wait about a minute before checking to see if it has logged in and attached to a queue Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit Is the LineJet Print Server already servicing a queue on another file server If so it cannot service another file server at the same time Is there an available NetWare user license for the LineJet Print Server to utilize while it acts as a PSERVER Every PSERVER takes up one user license since it logs in to the Novell file server When going through the PSERVER setup steps did you name the LineJet Print Server M_
144. e similarly to the IGP 110 with respect to certain commands All new users with new applications should select the Disable option Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual e Disable The IGP does not emulate the IGP 110 mode e Enable The IGP emulates the IGP 110 version Error Handling Following are several options which define how errors are reported Error Msgs e Enable Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when command parameters are incorrect e Disable Error checking and error messages are suppressed Error Markers e Enable Prints the following error markers for those elements that print beyond the page boundaries gt gt for elements that begin off the right side of the page lt lt for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page for elements where the starting position of the command contains an error other than an off page error IGP VGL Code V Emulation Offpage Errors Disable Does not report errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page e Enable Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page Barcode Errors e Enable An error message will print when invalid bar code data is encountered e Disable Code V will not print an error for illegal bar code data the bar code will be skipped Note When Barcode Errors is disabled the Code V emulation will try
145. ect of the claim and for damages for bodily injury or death to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU Trademark Acknowledgments Hewlett Packard HP HP UX Bi Tronics HP in a circle Hewlett Packard PCL and HP rounded rectangle are registered trademarks and LineJet is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company AIX AS 400 IBM NetView Proprinter and OS 2 are registered trademarks and AFP Intelligent Printer Data Stream IPDS Print Services Facility and PSF are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation IBM and Proprinter are registered trademarks and PC DOS is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Portions of this manual used by permission of Wyndham Technologie
146. ed one to display the printer configuration window 16 Assign a name if not an existing printer to this printer 17 At the Type field select Remote Other Unknown 18 Press ESCAPE to save the changes 19 Press ESCAPE until back at the Print Server Configuration menu 20 Select Queues Serviced by Printer to display a list of defined printers 21 Select the printer you just defined and press ENTER 22 At the list of queues that displays press INSERT to add a queue to the list 23 Select the queue defined and press ENTER 24 When prompted for a priority press ENTER to select the default or select a priority 25 Press ESCAPE until you have exited PCONSOLE 26 Reload the PSERVER NLM that the LineJet Print Server is to service as an RPRINTER 27 Repower the Print Server by turning the printer off and then on 28 Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the appropriate printer is being serviced The PSERVER should indicate that the printer is Waiting for job At this point the LineJet Print Server knows to receive any jobs this PSERVER NLM has to send to it through the defined printer NetWare Version 4 x PSERVER Setup LineJet Print Server destinations are case sensitive and will not be recognized if they are typed incorrectly By default they are all lower case If you are setting up a NetWare 4 environment the destination must be renamed to uppercase to match the PCONSOLE
147. ed and the printer is ready for the next data transfer Printer Busy Peripheral Acknowledge nWait Driven by the printer Indicates the printer cannot receive data Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble Mode Acknowledge Data Request nAcknowledge Reverse Driven by the printer Indicates the printer is in a fault condition Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble mode Xflag Driven by the printer A high true level indicating the printer is ready for data transfer and the printer is online Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode Host Busy Host Acknowledge NDStrobe Driven by the host Activates auto line feed mode Peripheral Logic High Driven by the printer When set high the printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When set low the printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state nReverse Request Driven by the host Resets the interface and forces a return to Compatibility mode idle phase nData Available nPeripheral Request Driven by the printer Indicates the printer has encountered an error Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode 1284 Active nAStrobe Driven by the host A peripheral device is selected Host Logic High Driven by the host When set to high the host indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When set to low the host indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state ninit Resets init interface from the host 245 Chapter 14 _Bi Tronics Paralle
148. eded If you do not do this the LineJet Print Server will need to poll the file server twice as much to get all the information it needs 8 Press ESCAPE and select Yes to save the changes to this new printer 9 Re power the LineJet Print Server by turning the printer off and on to make the changes take effect Changing The Print Server Name NDS amp Bindery When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server a new print server must be defined to represent the LineJet Print Server This name must match the pre defined name given to the print server By default this name is in the format M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the LineJet Print Server s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device e g M_091C1A You must make sure that the print server object that you are using for your PSERVER setup has the same name as that stored on the LineJet Print Server If you need to rename the print server object in Netware Administrator please delete the object and re create it with the new name Netware administrator seems to have some problems with renaming objects Note i Changing the name will effect all of the protocols that are running on the LineJet Print Server 201 Chapter 11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration 10 100Base T HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL
149. eeeeeees 177 FTP Printingic cccscedtecen E ds Meee E 179 Remote Shell Printing c cccccseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeneeeeseas 179 Unix Troubleshooting Tips semiari enia a A 180 Noting Prints xietvccctteteiye E E aehatets 180 Stair stepped Output eee ceceee cece eeeeee scene eeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeneeeees 181 No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out 181 10 Novell Configuration 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 OVVIE Wc urn nasisira aiea reaa ae aana a aa Aaa a nde eed tetad 183 Novell Environment Description ssssseessssseresssrrssesrrrssrrrrsnsrrenessrens 184 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration cccccesceeseeeeeseeeees 184 Using IT ML Forms crr ti a iar antes 185 Novell Host Configuration cc cceccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeees 186 NetWare Version 3 x PSERVER Setup cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 186 NetWare Version 3 x RPRINTER Setup cesceesseeeeeseeeeeees 188 NetWare Version 4 x PSERVER Setup ccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 189 NetWare Version 4 x RPRINTER Setup cescceseeeeeseeeeeees 191 Table of Contents Novell Troubleshooting Tips cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeaas 193 NetWare 3 x No PSERVER Connection s es 193 NetWare 4 x No PSERVER Connection aenescens 194 11 Novell Configuration For 10 100Base T INTIS ACCS ieee areni aeaa ARRETE 195 DIAE EE EA E E E E 195 Novell LineJet Print
150. eld requires the IP address for the LineJet Print Server and the second field must be filled in with a valid destination from the print server e g d1prn Otherwise LPR will not be able to access the printer Table 12 outlines the default destinations to choose from Table 12 LineJet Print Server Default Destinations Destination Mapped I O Port diprn PRN d2prn PRN d3prn PRN d4prn PRN This name can be changed to something more meaningful using the built in HTML forms To do this 1 Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL http LineJetIPaddress destConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 destConf htm1 Note i If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 152 2 At the Print Path Configuration HTML form that displays select a destination link from the top of the page to bring up the appropriate destination form By default you should see a line near the top of the form showing the destinations listed in Table 12 3 Once the desired destination HTML form displays highlight the Name field and type in the new name for this destination 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server to make the new setting take effect Windows NT 3 51 Host Setup Windows Host Configuration This section covers Windows NT and Windows 95 Win
151. encing a Bindery queue in NDS the Novell Mode on the LineJet Print Server must be set to auto so that both NDS and Bindery logins are possible See Setting The LineJet Print Server Context NDS on page 204 209 Chapter 11 Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup Netware 3 x and 4 x This procedure associates an existing PSERVER with a remote LineJet Print Server acting as a RPRINTER NPRINTER in a NetWare 3 x or Netware 4 x environment It is the PSERVER s responsibility to get jobs from the queue and to pass them off to the LineJet Print Server acting as the remote printer Unlike a PSERVER setup the LineJet Print Server does not deal directly with the queues Note As an RPRINTER NPRINTER the print server does not use a login ID A non LineJet Print Server print server such as PSERVER NLM or K PSERVER EXE must be running for RPRINTER to operate Also if the LineJet Print Server loses a connection to a PSERVER it will automatically reconnect when that server becomes available again The following steps assume that you have created a PSERVER object in either Netware 3 x or Netware 4 x and have assigned printers and queues to it If you have not already done this do it now The setup is similar to creating a PSERVER setup for the LineJet Print Server except that there are no restrictions about which names may be used for the print server and printer objects Note Write down t
152. ep Max Line Width Face CPI Delay Graphics Density Perforation Skip Display Functns Line Terminator LF After CR CR After LF CR after FF CR After VT PTX Linefeed LPI Adjust Page L Lines Page L Inches Config Print Symbol Set Print Reset Cmd CFG Ld LP PLUS Printer Protocol P Series Control Code 06 Control Code 08 Define CR Code Auto LF Overstrike Define LF code Select SFCC EVFU Select Alt Set 80 9F Character Set IBM PC Primary Subset Extended Subset SFCC d command CPI LPI Select Select CPI Select LPI PCL II 0 Roman 8 8U 10 00 Data Processing 0 Roman 8 8U 10 00 Data Processing Inches Page 13 2 inches Enable 60 DPI Disable Disable isable isable isable nable isable LPI 6 Lines 1 0 Inches FPADUVUAUUY Power Up Config 8 0 LPI Elongated CR CR Disable Enable LF CR LF 1 Enable Control Code ASCII USA Code Page 437 Even dot plot 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Font Attributes Typeface Prop Spacing Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Zero Page Format Form Length Abs Length IN Abs Length MM Funct of lines Form Width Abs Width IN Abs Width MM Function of CPI Margins Left Margin Right Margin Bottom Margin Perforation Skip MAINT MISC Hex Dump Mode Power up State Display Language Power Stacker HOST INTERFACE Bi Tronics Prime Signal TOF Action Buffer Size in K PRINTER CONTROL Unidirectional PMD Fault
153. er can send data e Versatility If a device cannot send data along particular lines the Bi Tronics interface can send data via other operating modes such as Nibble Mode which is discussed later e Less user interaction The host can ask the printer about printing status and supported features such as fonts and internal errors For example instead of having to physically check if the printer has run out of paper you can create a program to query this from the host The printer will respond and a message will display on the host Operating Modes The Bi Tronics interface supports three operating modes which are determined by negotiation between the printer and the host Compatibility Mode This mode provides compatibility with Centronics like host I O Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8 bit bytes over the data lines Compatibility mode can be combined with nibble and byte modes to provide bidirectional communication Nibble Mode Eight bits equals one byte When a byte of data is sent to the printer the eight bits are sent over eight data lines Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines To bypass this the Bi Tronics interface permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines Half a byte equals one nibble Two sequential four bit nibbles are sent over the lines Data is transferred from printer to host in four bit nibbles over the status lines and the host controls the tran
154. er cycled To ensure this does not happen be sure to issue a save command so the current settings get written to flash memory set date year month day set date 1997 02 10 Set the current date noting the four digit year the two digit month from 01 through 12 and the day being the number in the month If the LineJet Print Server is reset this value will be lost so you will need to set the date again set dest destination name newname set dest dlprn name laser Change the current name of the destination to anew name as indicated by newname This newname must be nine characters or less or it will be truncated These names are case sensitive set dest destination backchannel prn prn set dest dlprn backchannel prn Establish a return path for printer feedback for a given destination Since the LineJet Print Server I O port is bi directional however you will most likely use the same I O port that the destination is currently sending jobs to set dest destination model modelname set dest dlprn model m4 Associate a model with a destination Jobs sent to the named destination are processed according to the options defined in the named model set dest destination logpath logpathname set dest dlprn logpath 14 Associate a logpath with a destination Jobs sent to the named destination are logged according to the settings defined in the named logpath 223 Chapter 12 Complete Command List set dest destination service socket 1lpd lpsc
155. er is contained inside a character cell The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character e Disable Each character cell is printed with the same width Each column in the printed text will line up This example is printed with proportional spacing disabled e Enable The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character For example i takes less space to print than m Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents giving text a typeset appearance This example is printed with proportional spacing enabled 81 Chapter 4 _ Emulation Menu Bold Print e Disable Text is printed normally e Enable Text is printed with a heavy line thickness Italic Print e Disable Text is printed normally e Forward Slant Text is printed with a forward slant e Backward Slant Text is printed with a backward slant Slashed Zero This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash Page Format Forms Length Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page You can set forms length in inches millimeters mm or as a function of the current LPI lines per inch Forms Width The forms width can be specified in inches millimeters or as a fu
156. er is in an environment subject to extremes of temperature or humidity store the printer paper in a better environment and move it to the printer as needed 285 Appendix B _ Summary 286 Standard ASCII Character Set B7 Bits 55 KEY B4 B3 B2 B1 OCTAL DECIMAL HEX ASCII CHARACTER COLUMN 0 w m o oO _ caiiad be x O _ Sas Jew E peah feoelaae pee fee fem nl Oo 9 090 9 j N R O a BE O N Oo Bs O D Oo Oo an ACK BEL Oo n 0 9 1 Y N N N N N ZE asalsas sxlesg yo N N N P N N OROINDNID ND Joan Nw on N Ow roan wo ao vv ofan oO KR JON wo a 00 f ow p THANMOCHIVO el Ueo owo kD on Oa Dw NONMI Q wo wa ogo jw o AM BR lo QD Jw on D MM ou oan OR Ooaan Nan oan ano f N JOO mM JON oa gt o an ow N R o njeo ajoo WOON JW DN Iwo TON IMNO D IO QGofkFVoalsVo aR a ons A N RO O e p OND RO A ARO f aog an O OOG No a A N AN aA fONS aN AN SRE Oo AN AN AN AN E OENE O T AN T a Appendix C 288 D Monitoring Printers Implementing Printer Management Printer management includes the following tasks e Monitoring the status of network printers e Responding to alarms e Gathering statistics on printer operations The three elements of network printer monitoring
157. er mode the STAT LED flashes at a varying rate depending on whether the unit IP address is configured The Run Mode and Auto Reset Mode indicator descriptions are given in Table 2 Table 2 Indicator Modes STAT Indication Description OFF flashes on once per second Normal Mode IP address configured OFF flashes on twice per second IP address not configured ON flashes off once per second Download MOS ON flashes off twice per second Error 29 Chapter 1 30 LineJet Print Server Network Indicator The NET LED displays the status of the network link When the NET LED is on link integrity is confirmed The NET LED flashes off for 1 3 second when a data packet is being transferred When the NET LED is off the network connection has been severed Dipswitches On the back of the interface you will find a small window where you can access two dipswitches labeled 1 and 2 see Figure 4 The functions of the dipswitches are explained in Table 3 Table 3 Dipswitch Functions Dipswitch 1 2 Comments OFF OFF Normal operation With both dipswitches in the OFF position the LineJet Print Server boots up using the settings in flash memory rather than the default settings ON OFF Factory default settings With the dipswitches in this configuration the LineJet Print Server boots up and erases all settings stored in flash memory except the Ethernet address and
158. er type eng root Assign root or guest privileges to a particular user defined by username Guest permissions allow viewing of settings only Root permissions allow complete control of the LineJet Print Server set user from default Set all user settings back to factory defaults set user from stored Set all current user settings to the values stored in flash memory set user passwd snmp com_ name Sets the new SNMP R W community name as the com_name value set var variablename variablestring set var LANDSCAPE 0x1lb 0x26 0x6c 0x31 0x4f set var FINISH FF PCL RST Define a new variable to be used in header trailer or switch strings on the LineJet Print Server and call it variablename variablestring can be a space separated list of words hexadecimal numbers e g 0x04 or references to other pre defined variables It is easiest to make up the variablestring with hexadecimal values as shown in the example One variable counts as one element within header and trailer strings 229 Chapter 12 Complete Command List 230 Defined variables are referenced in strings by placing an before the variable name e g set model m1 trailer SFF set var from default Set all variable settings back to factory defaults set var from stored Set all current variable settings to the values stored in flash memory List Commands These commands list the current or working settings for a particular section within the command shell T
159. er using the same IP address as above Log in as root with no password 165 Chapter 8 _ Windows Troubleshooting Tips 9 At the system prompt enter store tcpip from default config http on save reset Note i This will reset all TCP IP settings to factory default and reset the LineJet Print Server 166 10 Power the printer off and then back on 11 Set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway parameters to the desired values 12 If Web browser access does not work Telnet into the LineJet Print Server as root Enter the following command config http on If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer contact technical support Web Browser HTTP Problem In some cases you may not be able to browse the printer web page simply because the LineJet Print Server HTTP may be turned off If you cannot ping the LineJet Print Server IP address make sure the IP Address subnet mask and default gateway are set correctly by checking the Ethernet Parameters menu from the operator panel See Chapter 4 for configuration menu information If you can ping the LineJet Print Server IP address but cannot access the web pages perform the following procedure to verify the LineJet Print Server HTTP is turned on 1 Telnet into the Print Server and log in as root with no password 2 At the system prompt enter the following commands config http on save reset 3 After approximately 30 seco
160. erating system using System V print spooling e g SCO Solaris DG UX Sun 2 5 x 2 6 2 7 and similar etc This means an interface file is used for each defined printer and in the case of any System V print setup involving a LineJet Print Server the RSHD protocol is used to transfer data from the host to the print server To manually configure a new System V printer on a Unix station create a dummy device file that acts as a locking mechanism between contending print jobs Sys V printing is characterized by use of the lp printer interface program lpsched printer scheduler and the use of an interface file The file 1padmin is used in setting up the print queue definition As of Sun 2 6 and on the interface file net standard is provided in a generic interface file intended for network print servers such as the LineJet Print Server Also as of Sun 2 6 the ability to print to a socket Sometimes called raw tcp or a remote printer dest for LineJet is provided Root access is required to use 1pshut stop the print scheduler to add a new printer with Lpadmin lpsched and lpadmin For the following example assume the print queue to be created is lobby and the ping able IP Address name of the LineJet is LJ_PS1 and you wish to print to remote printer dest dlprn on LU_PS1 As always with Unix commands are case sensitive Also be sure to use the bourne or korn shell not the cshell1 when using the commands The command structure
161. ers have specialized architectures which enable the printer to emulate or behave like another printer These specialized architectures are restricted The LineJet printer however introduces an open architecture concept that is not available on any other line matrix printer The LineJet printer offers the standard emulation of Hewlett Packard s Printer Control Language PCL Level Il to allow easy online programming capabilities and compatibility with Hewlett Packard systems Additionally the LineJet printer offers the following three emulations as part of its LinePrinter Plus grouping Proprinter III XL Epson FX 1050 and P Series No matter what emulation is configured your printer is very easy to use The message display and indicator on the control panel communicate with you directly and clearly You can select every function on your printer at the control panel or you can send commands from the host computer 21 Chapter _ 1 _ Printer Overview C3202D C3204D C3205D C5640D C3201D Figure 1 The LineJet Printers 22 Taking Care Of Your Printer Taking Care Of Your Printer Your printer will produce high quality print jobs if it is well taken care of Periodic cleaning handling the printer properly and using the correct printer supplies such as paper and ribbons will ensure optimum performance Chapter 15 explains how to clean the printer and printer supplies are listed in Appendix A
162. erver to use See Changing The Frame Type NDS amp Bindery on page 202 You can find out what frame type is bound to which board number using the debug nest odi command or from the ODI Layer section on the Novell HTML status page Try a debug nest sap telnet command or find the SAP section on the Novell HTML status page to see if the LineJet Print Server is seeing any network activity Try a debug nest rprinter telnet command or find the RPRINTER section on the Novell HTML status page Look for an entry for one of the numbers 4 to 7 under ENP INFO The dest field should match the destination used on the LineJet Print Server If no entry is found check that the destination has the Novell service enabled If the ERROR CODE field has an error of 308 make sure no other RPRINTER setup is servicing this printer object at the same time Only one RPRINTER connection is allowed to service a PSERVER NLM printer If the LineJet Print Server has logged in to the file server but has not attached to the queue there may be a permission problem Make sure the appropriate users have rights to this queue they should be in the group everyone Also you may have to assign the queue to root so it is available to everyone If none of these solutions help your situation you may want to try the whole setup again Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go through the setup again follo
163. es the IGP 100 version Optimized Ratio This option selects different bar code ratios for certain bar codes including Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5 It is included for compatibility with the IGP X00 printers e Disable Uses standard bar code ratios e Enable Selects the alternate bar code ratios Error Report Sets the error reporting capability for IGP PGL forms e On Full boundary error checking reported Any element which falls off the current page is reported as an error Debug Mode The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is defined in Create Form Mode Each line of the Create Form is printed along with an error if one occurred This is the same functionality as if there were a slash entered before the Create Form Name Fault When an error occurs the error is printed and the message IGP PGL ERROR appears on the printer front panel The printer then stops printing and goes offline The error must be cleared before the printer can resume normal operation e Off No form boundary checking Graphic elements appear clipped if they are beyond the page boundaries 101 Chapter 4 _ Emulation Menu IGP VGL Code V Emulation The IGP VGL Code V emulation can be configured either through the printer s front panel or from the host computer with control codes For a detailed description of configuration with control codes see the QMS Code V Technical Reference Manual For information on configuring th
164. esent the LineJet Print Server This name must match the pre defined name given to the print server By default this name is in the format M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the LineJet Print Server Ethernet address found on a configuration printout or control panel settings under Ethernet parameters MAC Address e g M_071C1A 185 Chapter 10 Novell Host Configuration To use the HTML forms to define a print queue do the following 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP The command to change the print server name is Syntax store pserver name newname Example to change the name to micro1 store pserver name microl 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http LineJetIPaddress adminConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 adminConf htm1 Note i If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Atthe Administration Configuration HTML form that displays highlight the field beside the Name heading and type in the new name of the print server 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the printer to make the new setting take effect Novell Host Configuration Under all versions of NetWare both PSERVER and RPRINTER setups are supported by the LineJet Print Server Since a PSERVER setup is the most common you will
165. ess ENTER Select Print Server Configuration from the menu that displays Select Printer Configuration from the next menu to display a list of configured printers Select the first item listed as NOT INSTALLED and press ENTER At the printer configuration window type in the name for this new printer This name must be one of the pre defined destinations queues on the LineJet Print Server This will normally be d1prn Go to the Type field and press ENTER to see the possible choices Select Defined Elsewhere from this list When done press ESCAPE and select Yes to save the changes to this new printer Press ESCAPE again to return to the Print Server Configuration menu Select Queues Serviced by Printer Select this new printer from the printer list that displays and press ENTER At the empty queue list that displays press INSERT Select the queue created in step 5 and press ENTER When prompted for the priority press ENTER to select the default or select a priority Press ESCAPE until back at the PCONSOLE Main Menu Repower the printer Wait two minutes and then select Print Queue Information from the PCONSOLE Main Menu Select this new queue from the menu that displays Select Currently Attached Servers to see which print server is servicing this queue At this point the LineJet Print Server name e g M_071C1A should show within this window This means the L
166. etermine what frame type is bonded to which board number under Novell debug nest pserver View the Novell PSERVER log messages including queues attached to debug nest rprinter View the Novell PSERVER and RPRINTER log messages and destinations used on the LineJet Print Server debug nest sap Determine whether the LineJet Print Server is seeing any Novell network activity debug netbios List NetBIOS i e Windows 95 and WfW statistics debug nif List network interface statistics debug novell List file and print servers debug tcp List TCP stack statistics Miscellaneous Commands These commands do not fall under any specific section of the command shell but they are used quite frequently save default Save the current settings to flash memory so they are available after power cycles Sysinfo destination model logpath variable user and I O port settings will be saved If default is specified as well factory settings will be saved overwriting any new settings you have configured reset Perform a warm boot or hardware reset simulating a power on reset Restores current settings to those stored in flash memory since the flash memory settings will be read and loaded into memory upon bootup load default Load the settings stored in flash memory and use them as the current or working settings If default is specified as well factory settings will be loaded lpstat ioport jobID lpstat prn Display
167. ets except OCR A and OCR B e Enable Zero is printed with a slash Disable Zero is printed without a slash Ignore Dots e Disable The default e Enable Causes the Code V to expect position values to be specified in only 1 10ths of an inch If the dot position is also given it is treated as text Append Rotated e Disable Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate elements Enable Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise counterclockwise or inverted orientation IGP VGL Code V Emulation Truncate Alpha When enabled this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 Element Off Page Error if alphanumeric data including spaces extends beyond the right side of the form True Vert 1 10 e Disable A vertical 1 10 of an inch parameter is used as 7 72 of an inch The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected For example a one inch move would be 70 72 of an inch Vertical moves that have the same value will be identical in length e Enable A vertical 1 10 of an inch parameter is used as 1 10 of an inch Rounding occurs to the nearest 1 72 of an inch This can cause vertical moves that have the same value to differ by 1 72 of an inch Absorb after PY e Absorb Motion Prevents paper motion following a system terminator in a graphics PY command e Absorb All The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host generated terminator is detected e Disabl
168. etup referencing a Bindery queue in NDS and RPRINTER NPRINTER setups Troubleshooting tips This section covers PSERVER setups RPRINTER NPRINTER setups and printing related problems 195 Chapter 11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration 10 100Base T Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration 10 100Base T 196 There are no mandatory Novell settings needed before the print server can be detected on the network However there can be some mandatory settings needed before a Novell print queue can be serviced by the LineJet Print Server These mandatory settings are covered separately for Netware 3 x and 4 x under the Host Configuration heading The print server setup in a Novell environment is much simpler than that required in a TCP IP one No addresses masks or router entries are necessary and in most cases the LineJet Print Server can simply be connected to the network turned on and then configured for printing from a Novell station through PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator See Figure 16 for an example of a Novell network which shows the use of file servers and how they relate to the print server There are however some optional parameters you may wish to change such as the preferred file server s print server password polling time frame type print server name NDS context and NDS preferred tree The following sections describe these optional parameters
169. etwork plus any individual hosts specified in the list to have access 237 Chapter 13 Printer Monitoring And Logging Printer Monitoring And Logging 238 One of the key aspects of maintaining a computing environment is monitoring printer status and logging this information to useful places The LineJet Print Server allows this through its built in HTML forms command set and logpaths Printer And Print Job Monitoring To view the current status of an I O port on the LineJet Print Server you can use either Telnet or a Web browser as follows Telnet Using Telnet enter the Lpstat command directly on the print server after you have logged in as guest or root Web Browser Using a Web browser select the desired I O port on the Status HTML form that comes with the LineJet Print Server http LineJetIPaddress indexStatus html e g http 192 75 11 9 indexStatus html Whether using Telnet or a Web browser you are given a description of each I O port status and a list of queued jobs Table 14 describes some of the common terms you may encounter Table 14 Key Printer Logging Terms Term Description idle There is no job queued for the LineJet Print Server I O port blocked The printer is not allowing the LineJet Print Server to send data to it If this condition persists check that there is not a printer error and that the printer is online and ready to go waiting The LineJet Print Se
170. f the printer is using the Epson FX 1050 printer protocol it is in Epson FX 1050 emulation mode As used in this manual protocol and emulation mean the same thing 25 Chapter 1 Ink dots formed by hammer tips 26 Printer Overview Line Matrix Printing Your printer is an impact printer it creates characters by printing ink dots on paper The dots are printed on an invisible matrix mapped in printer memory see Figure 2 Dot impressions are made by an array of steel hammers mounted on a rapidly oscillating shuttle The hammers strike the paper through a moving ink ribbon Dot Column Matrix visible only to the printer Dot Row Character Row Character Column Figure 2 Dot Matrix Character Formation Serial matrix printers use a moving printhead with pins to form single characters sequentially along the printed line Unlike serial matrix printers the LineJet printer is a line matrix printer Line matrix printers divide every printable line into horizontal dot rows then print a dot row of the entire line at every lateral sweep of the shuttle During each sweep hammers are activated to print dots at the required positions in the dot row When the shuttle reaches the end of a sweep it reverses direction the paper advances one dot row and the hammers print the next row of dots as the shuttle sweeps in the opposite direction as shown
171. f TCP IP based Internets Getting the Latest MIB Information To obtain the latest copy of these and other RFCs FTP the files from one of the following two sources Internet ftp isi edu World Wide Web http www ietf org rfc html 292 Symbols Command 219 Numerics 15V PWR FAIL message 260 20 CPI Condensed 88 91 23 5V PWR FAIL message 260 48V PWR FAIL message 260 8 5V PWR FAIL message 260 A A TO D OVERUN message 260 Absorb after PY 105 Access Lists TCP 237 Access Methods 219 ACCESS NULL PTR message 260 Acknowledge signal 243 Active Emulation menu 73 All black test 124 All E s test 124 All H s test 124 All underlines test 124 Alt Set 80 9F 86 Alternate Char Set 88 Alternate Set 80 9F 91 93 Append Rotated 104 Architecture printer 21 ASCII Character Set 287 Auto LF 85 88 90 92 95 Auto Switching 118 Auto Uppercase 99 Autoport Switching 241 Autowrap 98 Index Barcode creating 25 errors 107 Baud Rate parameter 115 Bidirectional printing 121 Bi Tronics interface 244 configuration menu 111 operating modes 244 pinout signals 246 signals 245 Bold Characters 93 BTU 270 BUFFER OVERRUN message 260 Buffer size Centronics port 111 Buffer Size in K parameter 117 Centronics 113 serial interface menu 116 Busy on Strobe parameter Centronics 113 Busy signal 243 Byte mode 244 Centronics configuration 243 interface 242 interfa
172. field beside the Root Password heading and enter the existing root password By default there is no root password so you can go to the next step without typing anything in this field 4 Within the Root Password section click within the New field and enter the new root password 5 Within the Root Password section click within the Confirm field and enter the new root password again Remember this is case sensitive 6 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server to make the new setting takes effect From this point on anytime you log in to the LineJet Print Server as root you will need to specify this password or your login attempt will fail To clear this password or change it use the same Administration Configuration HTML form Just enter the appropriate Old password and put in the new one or nothing if you do not want a root password any longer The commands directly on the LineJet Print Server are set user from default save Note Remember your password If you forget it the only way to recover your password is as follows 1 set Dipswitch 1 on the adapter to the on position 2 power up 3 set Dipswitch 1 to the off position 4 power up a second time You will also have to restore all IP values 236 TCP Access Lists TCP Access Lists Within TCP IP environments the LineJet Print Server can restrict host access to dest
173. find the necessary steps to configure the LineJet Print Server as a PSERVER shown first Configuration for RPRINTER and NPRINTER setup follow the PSERVER information Note The LineJet Print Server can service up to four printers on one file server It can not service multiple file servers at one time 186 NetWare Version 3 x PSERVER Setup To configure a print queue on a NetWare 3 1x network 1 Log on to the Novell file server as supervisor 2 Enter PCONSOLE 3 Select Print Queue Information from the PCONSOLE Main Menu 4 Press INSERT to add a new queue to the list of currently defined queues showing 5 Type in the name of this new queue when prompted and press ENTER This can be any name you would like 6 Press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 NetWare Version 3 x PSERVER Setup Select Print Server Information and press ENTER Press INSERT when the list of existing print servers displays Type the name of the LineJet Print Server when prompted for a print server name and press ENTER when done By default the LineJet Print Server is named M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print server Ethernet address found on configuration printouts or reading MAC address on control panel e g M_071C1A Back at the print server list select this newly defined LineJet Print Server and pr
174. for each command listed Note If you see the word ifnumin any shell commands you should substitute a 1 unless directed to do otherwise This 1 represents the one network interface i e Ethernet supported 220 Store Commands These commands change the settings stored in flash memory and do not affect the current or working settings in memory A power cycle is needed before the stored settings become current store ifc ifnum utp li rx store ifc 1 utp li Modify the physical UTP interface properties where 1i enables link integrity and rx enables the increased receive threshold store ifc from default Set all UTP settings back to factory defaults store ifc from current Store all current UTP settings to flash memory so they are retained after a power cycle This ensures all current settings match what is stored in flash memory store pserver opts jobsecurity jobtimeout seconds store pserver opts jobsecurity jobtimeout 5 If jobsecurity is disabled any user can cancel queued jobs on the LineJet Print Server including guest users If jobtimeout is set to some value other than 0 the LineJet Print Server will only wait this amount of seconds when getting printer feedback This is only used if you have a logpath port and type set on a particular destination store pserver tcpsocket TCPportnumber port newTCPportnumber store pserver tcpsocket 4000 port 5000 Change a pre defined TCPportnumber on the LineJet
175. g the context stored on the LineJet Print Server for the print server object is wrong the print server object password is wrong or the print server object name is wrong Try a debug nest rprinter telnet command or find the RPRINTER section on the Novell HTML status page Look for the following type of line O ENPReadConfig 0 213 Destination lt X gt where lt X gt is between 0 and 3 If they all say Destination 65536 then the PSERVER setup did not complete properly If there was a valid queue under EPS QUEUES in the debug nest pserver command then the printer name probably doesn t match an existing destination name on the LineJet Print Server or Novell has been disabled for that destination If 213 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T there is a valid Destination line then double check that there is an entry for this number under the ENP INFO section Note Debug messages for the PSERVER setup are in the RPRINTER section here because the PSERVER setup on the LineJet Print Server shares some code with the RPRINTER setup e Try adebug nest logs telnet command or find the General Messages section on the Novell HTML status page Look for a valid entry for the printer It will look something like this O0 InitSinglePrinter printer lt X gt name lt NAME gt Then look for the following lines 0 Printf RemoteMonitor lt X gt printer is and 0 P
176. g standard or specialty forms consult a forms vendor who can ensure conformance to the guidelines in this appendix and who can recommend cost effective purchases Storage And Handling The performance of the printer depends to a large degree on the condition of the paper used therefore the following principles for packaging handling and storage are recommended Packaging To avoid damage during handling use top and bottom fillers in continuous form cartons to hold the paper stack firmly in place Proper packaging ensures that the paper remains flat and is not damaged along the edges Storage Do not store cartons directly on the floor and do not stack them more than six high Set each carton upright and squarely on the one underneath Do not place anything else on the stack of paper because this can damage the paper Preconditioning Forms Protect paper from temperature and humidity extremes Store paper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before using the paper This allows the moisture content of the paper to stabilize LP Series and LineJet printers are used at temperatures from 5 to 40 C 41 to 104 F up to 1524 meters 5000 feet from 5 to 32 C 41 to 90 F up to 2438 meters 8000 feet with a non condensing relative humidity of 10 to 90 For best results however store the printer paper at 18 to 24 C 65 to 75 F with a relative humidity of 40 to 50 If the print
177. guration Overview This chapter details the HP e3000 Host Configuration setup and the HP e3000 LineJet Print Server Configuration setup HP e3000 MPE XL MPE iX Host Configuration Note With the release of MPE iX version 5 5 and higher it is now possible to use l the spooler on the HP e3000 to control printing on devices attached to a K network The Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual HP P N 32650 90166 Edition 5 Sept 1998 or later and Configuring and Managing MPE iX Internet Services HP P N 32650 90835 are essential references to assist you in this configuration Follow the instructions below to configure printing to a LineJet Print Server by using TCP IP print to socket sometimes referred to as native tcpip mode The configuration parameters are set via entries in the file npconfig npconfig pub sys 1 If you have not already done so use program sysgen sysgen pub sys to add the necessary logical device descriptions Create one logical device for each LineJet Printer you wish to add a login as MANAGER SYS b enter the command run sysgen pub sys c atthe gt prompt enter io to start the I O configurator d enter the command io gt ad ldev xx id HPTCPJD path NONE HPTCPUJD is the HP supplied logical network device type e enterthe 1d xx configuration command to view the addition where xx is the logical device number you chose in step d f enter the commands io gt hold
178. h AIX NetView 6000 The AIX NetView 6000 program can manage any IP addressable device with an SNMP agent NetView 6000 can be used to set a network topology monitor a network diagnose problems and measure network performance Through its MIB Browser information about the resources affecting an event such as an alarm can be obtained Monitoring With Web JetAdmin Web JetAdmin version 6 x can monitor IP addressable devices containing the printer MIB OS 2 TCP IP To get SNMP EXE to work correctly to browse MIB items you may need to delete the following file d mptn etc mib2 tbl Setting The SNMP Community Name The default SNMP read only community name is public and cannot be changed Change the SNMP R W community name with the command set user passwd snmp com_name save where com_name is the new SNMP R W community name The default is no R W community name Note Changing SNMP community names or access rights may hinder or disable y applications that are monitoring your printers 291 Appendix D _ Monitoring Tools Reference For further information on SNMP and MIB refer to the following e RFC 1155 Structure and Identification of Management Information for TCP IP based Internets SMI e RFC 1156 Management Information Base for Management of TCP IP Internets MIB e RFC 1157 A Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP e The Simple Book An Introduction to Management o
179. hanumeric pattern that identifies missing or malformed characters improper vertical alignment or vertical compression 123 Chapter 4 Diagnostics Menu All E s A pattern of all uppercase E s that identifies missing characters misplaced dots smeared characters improper phasing problems or light dark character variations e E s TOF A pattern of all E s followed by a form feed to the next page top of form that identifies paper motion or feeding problems e All H s A pattern of all uppercase H s used to detect missing characters misplaced dots smeared characters or improper phasing e All Underlines An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank misalignment e All Black A condition where all dot positions are printed creating a solid black band e Shuttle Slow Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion at low speed e Shuttle Fast Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion at fast speed e Shuttle Only Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed e Phase Printer It is recommended that only a Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer run this test The Phase Printer test checks for wavy print The initial phase value is set in the factory The Customer Service Engineer CSE runs the test and checks the quality The phase value prints on the left margin If the print looks too wavy the CSE changes the Phase Value parameter by pressing
180. he LineJet Print Server is BSD capable and has an internal lp daemon Each Unix system has a remote shell function which can be used to access this process Sun etc is rsh UX is remsh AIX is remd For example printing the file etc inetd conf on an HP UX system to the second logical dest in the LineJet Print Server remsh MyLineJet lp d d2prn lt etc indetd conf You may also use this form cat etc inetd conf remsh MyLineJet lp d d2prn In this form of printing the printer status will be fed back as to on off line 179 Chapter 9 _ Unix Troubleshooting Tips Unix Troubleshooting Tips This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard configuration errors If you require technical support please have the following information or as much as possible when you call 1 What level of software are you running What type of attachment do you have What is your host operating system Give a detailed description of the problem arf op How often and when does the problem occur 6 Give adetailed description of your network and the components attached Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your LineJet Print Server configuration Nothing Prints e Can you ping the LineJet Print Server from your Unix station If not please refer to Chapter 6 TCP IP Configuration for information e Is the LineJet Print Server able to communicate with the attached printer
181. he file server or to one that you will create later in these steps Syntax store rprinter add PSERVERname printernumber LineJetdestination Example for an RPRINTER servicing printer 0 of the PSERVER NLM called pserver1 and sending jobs to the LineJet Print Server destination d1prn store rprinter add pserverl 0 dliprn Leave this LineJet Print Server login session and log on to the NetWare 3 x file server as Supervisor Load a PSERVER NLM if there is not one loaded already This will be the PSERVER that the LineJet Print Server services as an RPRINTER so it must match the PSERVER name given in step 2 Enter PCONSOLE Select Print Queue Information from the PCONSOLE Main Menu Press INSERT to add a new queue to the list of currently defined queues Type in the name of this new queue when prompted and press ENTER This can be any name you would like Press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu Select Print Server Information and press ENTER Press INSERT when the list of existing print servers displays Select the print server that you want the Print Server to service as an RPRINTER This is the PSERVER NLM loaded in step 4 Select Print Server Configuration from the menu that displays NetWare Version 4 x PSERVER Setup 14 Select Printer Configuration from the next menu to display a list of configured printers 15 Select an item from the list e g either an existing printer name or a Not Install
182. he printer number s assigned to the printer s you are going y to be using for this setup You will need them in a later step HTML Method 1 Load a PSERVER on your Netware 3 x or Netware 4 x file server i e issue a load pserver pservername command on the file server Note If itis an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4 x file server you must specify the u PSERVER name and context for pservername For example load pserver sales_ps sales hp 2 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 3 Direct your Web browser to URL http LineJetIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and y press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 4 Look under the Novell section and find a row in the RPRINTER category 210 RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup Netware 3 x and 4 x 5 Click on Enabled and enter the name used with the PSERVER NLM started in step 1 into the Print Server Name field Note If itis an NDS pserver only enter the PSERVER name and not the context y e g sales_ps 6 Enter the printer number of the printer you would like serviced into the Printer Number field and then select the destination on the LineJet Print Server you would like to use for output 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each additional printer
183. hed rprinter pserver netbios ftpd set dest dlprn service netbios Set the destination to handle only certain print services To add a service specify the service name To disable a service use before the name The available services are socket Direct socket printing via TCP IP Ipd LPR printing with TCP IP including LPR clients on any platform Ipsched LP or System V printing with TCP IP rprinter Novell RPRINTER support pserver Novell PSERVER support netbios Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups printing ftpd Printing using the File Transfer Protocol ftp via TCP IP set dest from default Set all destination settings back to factory defaults set dest from stored Set all current destination settings to the values stored in flash memory set logpath logpath name newname set logpath 11 name pagecount Change the current name of the logpath to a new name as indicated by newname This newname must be nine characters or less or it will be truncated These names are case sensitive set logpath logpath type job Juser pgent cksum printer ioport set logpath 12 type job user printer pgcnt Establish the type of printer and print job logging to be done within this logpath The options are job Job ID username etc user User ID along with three messages per job about start and finish pgcent For total pages printed in a job cksum 16 bit checksum value to confirm
184. his configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Data Terminal Ready DTR signal is generated This signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data e True Continuously asserts the DTR signal the default e On Line and BNF buffer not full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full e Off Line or BF buffer full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full e False Never asserts the DTR signal Request to Send This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Request to Send RTS signal is generated This signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data e On Line and BNF Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full the default e Off Line or BF Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full e False Never asserts the RTS signal e True Continuously asserts the RTS signal Buffer Size in K Configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer The default is 1 Kbyte but you may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments Ethernet Submenu Ethernet Submenu Factory Default Ethernet from page 110 Buffer Size in K 16 1 16 The Ethernet interface allows you to locate the
185. his parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using the ALPHA command e Disable The printer will print text in upper and lowercase e Enable The printer will print text in uppercase only Skip Cmd Prefix This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL command is received e Enable The printer ignores all data on the current line before an IGP command e Disable The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP command Power on IGP PGL You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer is powered on e Enable The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on The PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode e Disable The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on The PGL feature is initialized to the Quiet mode 99 Chapter 4 100 Emulation Menu Ext Execute Copy e Disable Dynamic data overlay data etc are not allowed if the optional Form Count parameter number of forms to print is specified as part of the Execute command This setting is GP 100 compatible Enable Dynamic data overlay data etc are allowed within a form in which the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command In this case the exact same form with identical dynamic data is printed for whatever the Form Count is However incremental data is not incremented since the page that is printing is exactly the same th
186. in Figure 3 One Text Line Printing Speed After a line of characters is printed the paper advances to the first dot row of the next print line This creates a number of blank rows between lines of characters depending on the print mode and line spacing you selected Direction of Shuttle Movement Dot Row Start 1 2 3 Paper Feed 6 Direction 7 8 T 000000 10 11 Number of rows is determined by line spacing n Q900 see 2 This row is used only for lowercase descenders This row is used for underlining and lowercase descenders Figure 3 Dot Matrix Line Printing Printing Speed The speed at which text prints is measured in lines per minute lpm This speed is directly proportional to the number of dot rows required to produce a character line regardless of the number of characters in the line More dot rows are required to print lowercase characters with descenders consequently those character lines print at a fractionally lower rate The printer also prints dot addressable graphic images The speed at which graphics are plotted is measured in inches per minute ipm Unidirectional plotting produces slightly better print quality and takes about twice as long as bidirectional plotting You can select either plotting mode from the control panel Printing and plotting rates also vary according to the print mode you select Print mode refers to the way y
187. inations queues and remote command i e rsh remd remsh and telnet execution services This is done using an access list similar in function to the Unix rhosts file To view the current access list on the print server complete the steps below Note i Access list settings are not configurable through the HTML forms provided with the LineJet Print Server 1 Start a Telnet session with the LineJet Print Server Syntax telnet LineJetIPaddress 2 Loginas root and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default or your password for your home set 3 List the current access list Syntax List tcpip If the TCP access table entry list is empty all hosts have access to the LineJet Print Server services If there are entries in the list only those hosts specified have access to printing and remote command execution To add and delete access list entries the commands are Syntax store tcpip tcp access add del hostIPaddress networkaddress reset where hostIPaddress is the IP address of a TCP IP host on your network and networkaddress is the address of a subnet on your network Example store tcpip tcp access add 192 75 11 25 store tcpip tcp access add 192 75 12 0 store tcpip tcp access del 192 75 11 25 reset Note Although the maximum number of entries in the access list is 10 each entry can refer to a network rather than a specific host This allows all hosts on that specified n
188. inder RibbonMinder is a user definable software feature which notifies the user when a ribbon should be changed It does this by monitoring ink consumption and alerts you when the print quality falls below a level you designate This is especially important if you are printing bar codes to be scanned ON LINE 100 lt printer emulation gt As printing continues the percentage of usable ink in the ribbon decreases ON LINE 74 lt printer emulation gt Ribbon ink being consumed ON LINE 8 lt printer emulation gt Ribbon life approaching end When 0 usable ink appears the printer is typically configured to stop printing and display the following message RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON Note Once you have set up options for RibbonMinder it works without attention When you begin printing with RibbonMinder enabled the message display shows a ribbon life value of 100 The ribbon life decreases as the ink is consumed 126 New Ribbon Whenever you install a new ribbon you must reset the ribbon life to 100 Once you install the new ribbon work your way through the configuration menus until New Ribbon appears on the LCD Press the ENTER key to reset the ribbon life to 100 Ribbon Action e Disable Removes the ink consumption display Ribbon Minder will continue to monitor how much ink is left in the ribbon e Display Activates the RibbonMinder ink consumpt
189. ine controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt Download the program again If the message occurs again call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX Hardware fault in the engine controller Call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM The printer encountered an error trying to program flash memory Download the program again If the message occurs again call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED The printer could not find any flash memory Call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED The printer could not find any DRAM Call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR NVRAM FAILURE The security PAL is not present or the non volatile memory has failed Call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM The printer requires more DRAM memory in order to run the downloaded program Add DRAM Call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH The printer requires more flash memory in order to run the downloaded program Add flash memory Call your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE The printer is not compatible with the downloaded program Use the correct emulation
190. ine or BF Disable 15 min 62 1500 lpm Do Nothing Enable False Novell Frame 5 sec 60 min 1 to 2000 Disable Request to Send Ethernet 802 2 Disable Paperout Adj Data Polarity On Line and BNF 802 2 Snap Instant Burnin Test Standard Off Line or BF Auto Sensing Print Error Log Inverted False Ethernet II Clear Error Log Resp Polarity True Ethernet 802 3 E Net Test Page Standard Inverted Buffer Size in K 1 1 16 Busy on Strobe Ethernet PPM Port Number 3001 0 65535 Test Width Full Width 80 col Paper Out Dots 40 dots 4 76 dots System Memory Enable Buffer Size in K PPM Port Timeout Disable 16 1 16 32 Seconds Latch Data On Auto Switching 1 255 Leading Parallel Hotport Ethernet Speed Trailing Port Type Auto Select Prime Signal Bi Tronics 10 Half Duplex Disable Centronics 10 Full Duplex Enable Ethernet 100 Half Duplex TOF Action Disable 100 Full Duplex Reset Trickle Time Do Nothing 1 4 Buffer Size in K 1 4 16 sec 1 1 16 Off Serial Timeout Interface Type 10 sec RS 232 1 60 sec RS 422 Report Status Data Protocol Disable XON XOFF Enable ETX ACK Serial Hotport ACK NAK Port Type DTR RS 232 Baud Rate RS 422 9600 Disable 19200 Trickle Time 38400 1 4 600 1 4 16 sec 1200 Off 2400 Timeout 4800 10 sec Word Length 1 60 sec 8 Report Status 7 Disable Enable x Megabytes Print Statistics On x x Hrs Print x x Hrs Print Strokes Print Lines 11
191. ineJet Print Server knows about this new Novell print queue it must service as a PSERVER Therefore it will poll this queue regularly looking for jobs to print Note i The LineJet Print Server can service up to four printers on one file server It can not service multiple file servers at one time 187 Chapter 10 Novell Host Configuration NetWare Version 3 x RPRINTER Setup These steps are for Novell environments with Netware 3 x or earlier file servers To configure a new RPRINTER on a NetWare 3 x network 1 Log in to the LineJet Print Server command shell npsh as root If you have TCP IP available and this print server already has an IP address stored within it you can use the built in HTML configuration forms or a Telnet session Please see Configuration Alternatives on page 64 for additional details If you have only Novell available you will need to use a PC laptop or terminal Note If you use HTML configuration you will need to go to the Network Configuration HTML form http LineJetIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 and look under the Novell section The settings in the following step are found there If using a Telnet session you will need to manually execute the commands listed in the next step 188 ONO Oo 10 11 12 13 Store the RPRINTER settings on the LineJet Print Server This will refer to an existing PSERVER NLM on t
192. ing on what type of interface cabling you installed while setting up your printer In addition to selecting an active interface this menu also allows you to configure several parameters for each interface e ETHERNET PARAMS Allows you to view and change the IP Address Gateway Address and Subnet Mask The MAC Address may also be viewed In addition Novell and Printer Manager options can be set e PRINTER CONTROL Allows you to select several operating parameters for the printer such as the speed at which paper will advance when FF Form Feed is pressed e DIAGNOSTICS Includes the printers diagnostic tests system memory and print statistics e RIBBONMINDER Allows you to enable the RibbonMinder feature and set its parameters 70 Config Control Menu CONFIG CONTROL Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config Power up Protect Config Configs 0 1 Current 1 0 Disable 1 2 Factory 2 1 Enable 2 3 Power up 3 2 3 4 All 4 3 4 5 1 5 4 5 6 2 6 5 6 7 3 7 6 7 8 4 8 7 8 5 8 6 7 8 To view options press v Down a Up gt Next 4 Prev To select an option press ENTER To return to main menu press CLEAR To exit menu press ON LINE Default Setting The CONFIG CONTROL menu manages configurations which are groupings of parameter values that can be stored in printer memory Brief descriptions follow for each option
193. ing information as you can available when you call i Jie PO S 6 What level of software are you running What type of attachment do you have What is your host operating system Give a detailed description of the problem How often and when does the problem occur Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your LineJet Print Server configuration LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On The Network Have you assigned the LineJet Print Server a unique and valid IP address which corresponds with the other IP addresses on your network For example are you sure no other device is using this IP address Are you sure you are trying to talk to the LineJet Print Server from a Windows station on the same subnet Currently the print server can only be seen locally unless you configured a routing entry earlier If you look at the back of the printer is the STAT LED flashing once a second or is it quicker than that A slower once a second rate tells you that the print server is in fact configured with an IP address A faster rate says it knows nothing about this so you may need to try the configuration process again Have you confirmed that the network connection to the LineJet Print Server is working correctly Trying different network cables and locations will help narrow down the problem HTML Configuration Forms Will No
194. ing under various TCP IP environments including all variations of Unix Printing can come from multiple hosts directly or through central spooling machines Figure 14 illustrates this Linux Solaris Ultrix F OSF 1 SparcStation SunOS 4 1 1 B IP Router m E L 5 E a ne Z O Y Figure 14 Unix Integration 170 Mandatory Unix LineJet Print Server Configuration There are mandatory settings needed before the print server can be detected on the network as well as some additional optional settings This section offers alternative methods for configuring your LineJet Print Server and mentions some of the more common optional settings available Mandatory The LineJet Print Server must be assigned TCP IP values of IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Value if required before setting up and establishing print queues and logical Unix printers Refer to Chapter 6 TCP IP Configuration for more information Additionally the file etc hosts on the Unix system or the DNS server known to the Unix workstation being set up must be updated to include the IP Address and logical name for the LineJet Print Server or a
195. int Server Configuration Verification LineJet Print Server Configuration Verification 1 Print the Current Configuration in the printer and verify the installed Function Code minimum version 356351 Version 2 07P or later Install the latest version via ftp if not present and reenter all printer configurations For ftp instructions see Loading Code Through The Ethernet Port Using ftp on page 36 The Function Code version installed is listed as Program File Version xxxx Part No xxxxxx at the top of the configuration printout Ethernet Version is a few lines below the program File version on the configuration printout The Ethernet firmware version must be 1 1 3 or later and is only copied to the printer when the Function Code is loaded via the Network Interface via ftp 2 On the Current Configuration printout a Under Host Interface verify Ethernet is selected and change the buffer size to 8K from 16K b Under Ethernet Parameters verify the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway are correctly listed c If you are not using Novell or NetBIOS for network printing disable Novell and NetBIOS under Ethernet parameters This avoids unnecessary protocol broadcasts Note When going through the menus continue pressing the arrow key until the y menu you want displays 3 Print the E Net Test Page as follows a OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL LEFT ARROW twice to PRINTER DIAGNOSTICS DOWN ARROW to PRINTER TESTS DOWN ARROW
196. inted region of the form The region outside the print area of the form The margin is typically bounded by the outermost vertical perforations i e where the tractor holes are located and the edge of the form The region where printing occurs and which is always between the side perforations The area in the printer where the actual impacts of printing occur A punch cut fastening stitch located along the vertical edge and within the side perforation region of a multipart form Note that this is not a metal staple The measured thickness between the print area of the form and the peak thickness of a major perforation Tenting is typically caused by overly stiff perforations or incorrect registration of the inner parts of multipart forms The area along a perforation between the cut points see above 277 Appendix B _ Paper Guidelines The figures below illustrate the terms used in this appendix VW k7 Side Perforation 5 x A paa Form Span Figure 21 Basic Forms Terminology Margin Area SSi o Major Perforation oder Tractor Pin Hole Print Area Side View of Form pe Printed Side of Form gt Outward Perforation Inward Perforation lt Figure 22 Inward and Outward Perforations Perforation e a O O O VW K7 278 Cut Point Figure 23 Cut Points and Tie Points pa Tie Point Z ee Environmental Considerations Env
197. inter processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex 9F as control codes or as printable characters Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the character set menu To use one of these sets choose the desired group heading such as Multinational and press ENTER Then choose the desired set within that group Such as EBCDIC and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set name will include an asterisk to indicate your selection SFCC d Command e Even dot plot This option interprets SFCC d Command as even dot plot Double high This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility Printer Protocol from page 80 Proprinter XL Proprinter XL Emulation Proprinter XL Emulation Factory Default Define CR Code Auto LF Define LF Code FF valid at TOF Character Set Alt Char Set 20 CPI Condensed CR CR CR CR LF Enable Disable Define CR Code LF LF LF CR LF Enable Disable Code Page 437 Code Page 850 Set 1 Set 2 Enable Disable OCR A OCR B Latin 2 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859 15 Polish POL1 Multinational ASCII USA EBCDIC DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 PC851 LtGk 12G Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G This option controls the a
198. inting 90W 84W 86W 84W Heat 648 BTU hr 652 BTU hr 925 BTU hr 1342 BTU hr Printing Maximum 1092 BTU hr 833 BTU hr 1297 BTU hr 1754 BTU hr Non Printing 307 BTU hr 287 BTU hr 294 BTU hr 287 BTU hr 1 Printing Typical 120 VAC 50 60 Hz Shift Recycle ASCII Swirl High Speed Mode 2 Printing Maximum 120 VAC 50 60 Hz All Black High Speed Mode 3 Non Printing 120 VAC 50 60 Hz Standby Mode Material Safety Data Sheets If the customer site needs a Material Safety Data Sheet provide the following information HP part or product number Chemical substance description Customer name Customer address Customer telephone number Customer FAX number 271 Appendix A _ Communication Notices Communication Notices 272 Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provided reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be requ
199. inting The protocol for a print job and the protocol for the management tool will often be different These ideas are also what differentiate networks by size and network protocol use Some common network arrangements include peer to peer networks and print job servers Peer To Peer Networks Peer to peer networks can be used when you have few machines few printers only one network protocol and when any host can print to the printer A variation of this is a mini server which shares its printer with the other networked computers in a single room or building The LineJet Print Server improves flexibility in printer placement and setup by becoming just another peer rather than dedicated to a single machine A common peer to peer network arrangement is comprised of Windows 95 98 with TCP IP configured to use the netBEUI protocol to connect to the print server A second common extension of this arrangement is to install a third party LPR PORT MONITOR on each PC and use simple TCP IP to connect to the print server If Windows NT is used for the peer computers LPR is included and is easy to set up Windows 95 98 does not have such a monitor but many are available for free for download from the Web 129 Chapter 5 _ Overview 130 Print Job Servers In most larger networks print jobs usually are managed by designating one protocol and method for printing and then designating specific computers as print job servers ra
200. ion display Allows you to continually monitor the percentage of ink left in the ribbon Fault Activates a fault message when the display reaches 0 RibbonMinder Menu RibbonMinder Menu RIBBON Factory Default MINDER New Ribbon Ribbon Ribbon Fault Ribbon Action Size Adjust Action Press ENTER _ Disable 60 yards 0 New Ribbon to reset ribbon Display 1 255 99 to 99 Do Nothing life to 100 A Fault new ribbon must be installed after setting the ribbon life to 100 Ribbon Size The standard ribbon size is 60 yards You can use the Ribbon Size option to specify the ribbon length in one yard increments with a maximum of 255 yards Ribbon Adjust Adjusts the number of pages printed before the display reaches 0 If the ribbon normally prints 1000 pages before reaching 0 configuring the Ribbon Adjust to 20 will print 200 more pages than normal before reaching 0 A Ribbon Adjust setting of 20 will cause the display to reach 0 after 200 fewer pages than normal The setting can range from 99 through 99 Fault Action e New Ribbon Changing the ribbon while in the RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON fault mode will reset the ribbon life to 100 just as if the New Ribbon menu option was executed Do Nothing The ribbon life may only be reset through the New Ribbon menu option RibbonMinder Fault When the RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON faul
201. ired to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits Printronix is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Avis de conformite aux normes du ministere des Communcations du Canada Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conform a norme NMB 003 du Canada European Community EC Conformity Statement This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council Directive 89 336 EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of the product including the fitting of non Printronix option cards German C
202. ironmental Considerations Before they are used forms should be stored for at least 24 hours preferably 48 hours in the environment in which they will be used This stabilizes the moisture content of the paper resulting in better feeding and stacking Forms should neverbe stored in environments that result in damage such as delamination of glues creasing folding etc Form Types Three kinds of continuous form paper are specified for use with the printer e Edge perforated fanfolded single part forms e 2 to 6 part multipart carbon forms e 2 to 4 part multipart carbonless forms For all forms the width range is from 3 to 17 inches and the length range is from 2 to 12 inches Form Weight Use 15 to 100 pound 6 80 to 45 36 kg stock Light weight and recycled forms must be strong enough to assure that tractor holes and perforations do not tear or detach during form feed skipping and ejecting operations Form Thickness Forms must be no thicker than 0 025 inches 0 0635 cm This figure is for the thickest point of the form including glue lines staples perforations etc and is not restricted to just the print area Form Evenness The evenness of forms must not exceed 0 003 inches 0 00762 cm across the print area between the side perforations Tenting caused by buildup of perforation thickness must be minimized A perforation thickness measured at the major perforation that exceeds 1 25 ti
203. ironments rely on TCP IP to communicate with the LineJet Print Server crossing routers becomes an issue After following one of the LineJet Print Server configuration methods mentioned you should be able to communicate only with the print server from the same subnet This means any hosts across a router will not see your LineJet Print Server In order for hosts across a router to see your LineJet Print Server store a default router gateway within the print server so that any packets destined for another subnet get forwarded to this router automatically The router or series of routers can then take over ensuring the packets get to their final destination on another subnet on your network To configure a default router gateway within the LineJet Print Server 1 Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL http LineJet IPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf html Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays click in the first field below the Gateway heading and type in the IP address of the default router gateway for the LineJet Print Server subnet 3 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server to make the new settings take effect Changing Workgroup Names Windows e
204. is no password by default 199 Chapter 11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration 10 100Base T 3 Look under the Novell section and add the new password to the Pserver Password field Note The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE must y match the password set on the unit 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re power the printer to make the new settings take effect Print Server Setup Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and y press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print Server s IP address followed by a colon then root ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell passwd password Note The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE must u match the password set on the unit 4 Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect reset Adjusting Polling Time NDS amp Bindery You can set the poll time the LineJet Print Server will use when checking for new jobs under a PSERVER setup To do this complete the following steps Netware 4 x 1 Log in to NetWare Administrator as a user with security equal to Admin on your Novell host 2 Double click on the printer objec
205. is received e Enable Automatically inserts a CR LF after a full print line Select SFCC You can specify which decimal code 1 255 will be used as the Special Function Control Code SFCC The factory default setting is 126 The SFCC denotes that the following data is a PGL command PI Slew Range You can specify how many lines the paper will feed e 16 A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines e 15 A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will move 1 line CR Edit This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed e Disable The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by line feeds e Enable The printer processes all carriage returns even for those that are not followed by line feeds IGP PGL Emulation Select Font This parameter allows you to select a font for the IGP PGL feature The default is 0 which is U S ASCII The following values are valid choices U S ASCII German Swedish Danish Norwegian Finnish English Dutch French Spanish 0 Italian 1 Turkish Values 12 23 are undefined and will default to 0 You can set values 24 31 to specific fonts refer to the USET command in the IGP PGL Technical Reference Manual OONOODOOBRWN O Select LPI This is the number of lines to be printed per inch For example at 6 Ipi there is 1 6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line Auto Uppercase T
206. isable Enable To view options press v Down gt Next NOTES 4 Prev Choices available are limited to the emulations configured with the printer 2 Appears only if the power stacker option is installed To select an option press ENTER To return to main menu press CLEAR To exit menu press ON LINE Default Setting Figure 9 Configuration Main Menu 68 HOST ETHERNET PRINTER DIAGNOSTICS RIBBON lt q _ INTERFACE PARAMS CONTROL see page 123 MINDER see page 110 see page 120 see page 121 see page 126 Bi Tronics Serial cont IP Address Unidirectional Printer Tests New Ribbon Prime Signal Stop Bits XXX XXX XXX XXX Disable Shift Recycle Ribbon Action Disable 1 Gateway Address Enable All E s Disable Enable 2 XXX XXX XXX XXX PMD Fault E s TOF Display TOF Action Parity Subnet Mask Enable All H s Fault Reset None XXX XXX XXX XXX Disable All Underlines Ribbon Size Do Nothing Odd MAC Address Open Platen BOF All Black 60 yards Buffer Size in K Even hhhhhhhhhhhh Disable Shuttle Slow 1 255 1 1 16 Mark Novell Protocol Enable Shuttle Fast Ribbon Adjust Centronics Sense Enable Slow Paper Slew Shuttle Only 0 Data Bit 8 Data Term Ready Disable Disable Phase Printer 99 to 99 Enable True NetBIOS Protocol Enable 217 500 lpm Fault Action Disable On Line and BNF Enable Power Saver Time 123 1000 lpm New Ribbon PI Ignored Off L
207. l Interface Note The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer should y not exceed 10 meters 32 feet Table 16 Bi Tronics Signals Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 1 Host nStrobe HostClk Host Clk 2 Host Printer Data 1 LSB 3 Host Printer Data 2 4 Host Printer Data 3 5 Host Printer Data 4 6 Host Printer Data 5 7 Host Printer Data 6 8 Host Printer Data 7 9 Host Printer Data 8 MSB 10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk 11 Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy 12 Printer PError AckDataReq AckDataReq 13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag 14 Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck 15 Not Defined 16 Logic Grid 17 Chassis Grid 18 Printer Peripheral Logic High 19 Signal Ground nStrobe 20 Signal Ground Data 1 21 Signal Ground Data 2 22 Signal Ground Data 3 23 Signal Ground Data 4 246 Signals Table 16 Bi Tronics Signals continued Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 24 Signal Ground Data 5 25 Signal Ground Data 6 26 Signal Ground Data 7 27 Signal Ground Data 8 28 Signal Ground PError Select nAck 29 Signal Ground Busy nFault 30 Signal Ground nAutoFd nSelectln ninit 31 Host ninit 32 Printer NFault nDataAvail aDataAvail 33 Not Defined 34 Not Defined 35 Not Defined 36 Host nSelectin 1284 Active 1284
208. l paper motion e Enable Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes e Disable Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU commands when the PI signal is true Centronics Parallel Submenu Data Polarity The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer e Standard Does not expect the host computer to invert the data e Inverted Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted Ones become zeros and vice versa Resp Polarity The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer This option sets the polarity of the Acknowledge Online Fault Paper Empty and Busy signals e Standard Does not invert the response signals e Inverted Inverts the response signals sent to the host computer Busy on Strobe e Enable Asserts a busy signal after each character is received e Disable Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full Latch Data On The Latch Data On parameter specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data strobe signal Prime Signal e Disable The parallel port does not perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal e Enable The parallel port performs a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal TOF Action e Reset A form feed is performed before a warm start
209. ll need a third party TCP stack loaded onto your Windows station since TCP IP support did not automatically come with Windows until the introduction of Windows NT and Windows 95 You may also be running a third party stack if you decided not to use a Microsoft operating system Some common TCP stacks are FTP Software s OnNet NetManager s Chameleon and Frontier Technologies SuperTCP In each case they allow your Windows 3 1 station to communicate with other TCP IP devices This means you can send print jobs to the LineJet Print Server as well 161 Chapter 8 _ Windows Host Configuration 162 The most common print method offered with Windows TCP stacks is LPR LPD a multi platform remote printing protocol used on everything from PCs to mainframes The LPR print setup is very simplistic involving only two parameters 1 LineJet Print Server IP address The IP address or host name of the print server you want to print to 2 LineJet Print Server destination queue A pre defined name on the print server telling the device which I O port to send the jobs to The standard name for the PRN port is diprn This destination name is case sensitive and by default all names are lowercase LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On The Windows Troubleshooting Tips This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard configuration errors If you require technical support please have as much of the follow
210. mes the forms thickness measured in the print area will result in an unpredictable and unreliable form The perforation thickness must never exceed the maximum forms thickness of 0 025 inches 0 0635 cm Tractor Pin Engagement The printer uses tractors with 6 pin engagement Detailed engagement specifications are given in ISO 2784 but are summarized in the table below 279 Appendix B _ Paper Guidelines 280 Specification Inches Millimeters 6 0 0 10 Hole centerline CL to edge of form 0 236 0 028 Hole Diameter Serrations or any 0 156 0 004 4 0 0 10 occlusion due to incorrect registration of multipart forms cannot exceed this dimension Distance between centers of two 0 500 0 002 12 7 0 05 consecutive holes Maximum deviation of holes from their 0 004 0 10 centerline Maximum deviation of lefthand hole to 0 006 0 15 adjacent righthand hole CL to CL Maximum parallel deviation of lefthand 0 006 0 15 hole CL to righthand hole CL Methods Of Forms Attachment Any method of attachment staples crimps gluing etc must be designed in a way that does not permit air to be trapped between copies of a form Hard or wire brads and staples must not be used Any attachment must not coincide with the major perforation or any horizontal perforation Gluing Gluing must be controlled and uniform since it is a major contributor to the maximum form thickness
211. mware e multi level configuration security through passwords permission levels and access lists e Wide Area Network WAN communication access e numerous printer logging methods e g automatic email to record printer errors and usage e remote management through HTML forms Telnet sessions rsh remd remsh commands SNMP and pre defined log methods e extensive built in troubleshooting tools e built in telnet and ping clients e configurable memory usage by disabling protocols and destination services e multiple destinations queues for versatile printer manipulation and distinct print setups e header and trailer strings to instruct printers on font pitch printing etc e flexible naming conventions e automatic network connection and frame type sensing e simultaneous printing across all I O ports and all supported protocols e multiple network protocol support 28 Print Server Interface Print Server Interface The LineJet Print Server interface card at the rear of the printer has two indicator lights and two dipswitches as shown in Figure 4 _7 _ Dipswitches 1 2 Shown in OFF s default position STAT System Status le NET Data to Network Figure 4 Status Indicator Lights and Dipswitches Run and Auto Reset Modes Run Mode is the normal operating state of the LineJet Print Server Auto Reset mode is entered when the watchdog timer is triggered and the Print Server resets itself In eith
212. n Continue holding the ON LINE FF keys down for five seconds then release them Wait until you see WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD 4 Check that the function code file is on the computer by listing the contents of the directory where the function code is located Change CD to the directory that contains the function code file 5 Decompress the executable function code file on the hard drive of the computer by typing the following at the DOS prompt filename exe lt Return gt Where filename is the function code file e g 356351 exe This command decompresses the file and creates a file called filename prg e g 356351 prg in the same directory 6 Identify the target printer s IP Address from the Configuration Printouts you made in step 1 7 Start the ftp file transfer protocol process by typing the following at the DOS prompt ftp xxx xxx xxx xxx lt Return gt Where xxx xxx xxx xxx represents the IP Address of the printer Typically leading zeros are not entered For example address 134 039 090 191 would be entered as 134 39 90 191 36 Loading Code Through The Ethernet Port Using ftp Log in to the printer and at the user prompt type root lt Return gt Default is no password If the ftp program prompts you for a password contact the system administrator When you are logged in type the following sequence at the DOS prompt to download filename prg to the printer cd dest lt Return
213. n e g impact printers set prn flush set prn flush Flush the data in the parallel port input and output buffers set prn unlock set prn unlock Release the access lock on the parallel port set prn timeout minutes none set prn timeout none Terminate the print job sent to the parallel port if it is not printed after the timeout period in minutes expires The minutes value ranges from 0 though 255 with 0 indicating no timing out to take place This is the default setting and should be fine for most print setups set prn opost set prn opost Allow or disallow output processing on the parallel port such as carriage return insertion i e onler set prn onlcr set prn onlcr Enable or disable carriage return insertion on the parallel port This may be needed for Unix text jobs coming through with solitary linefeeds This feature is almost always set at the model level rather than the I O port level though set prn xtab tablength none set prn xtab none Set the tabstop width as indicated by tablength The range is 1 through 16 spaces set prn from default Set all parallel port settings back to factory defaults set prn from stored Set all current parallel port settings to the values stored in flash memory Set Commands set snmp To add a user named snmp with root privileges please follow the steps below 1 Login to the LineJet Print Server as a root user 2 Addauser named snmp set user add snmp
214. nation queue on the LineJet Print Server and it must be lowercase by default You will probably use diprn 154 9 Click OK when done specifying these two fields You now have a new network printer which relies on the standard TCP IP print protocol LPD to print remotely to a printer with the LineJet Print Server Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup This installation procedure assumes that the LineJet Print Server adapter is configured with the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway if required In addition the administrator can ping and telnet to the LineJet Print Server adapter from the server console If this is not the case use the printer front panel to configure the LineJet Print Server adapter before proceeding 1 Select Settings Printers from the Start menu 2 Double click on the Add Printer icon The Add Printer Wizard window is displayed Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer connections This printer will be managed by All settings will be managed and configured on this computer C Network printer server Connect to a printer on another machine All settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator Beck Cancel 3 Select My Computer and click Next Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup Add Printer Wizard Ba Q N j Local Port Acrobat PDF Local Port p Lo
215. nction of the current CPI characters per inch The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width Margins e Right Margin Set in columns Column zero is defined as the far right edge of the page and column numbering increments from right to left e Left Margin Set in columns Column zero is defined as the far left edge of the page and column numbering increments from left to right Bottom Margin Defined in lines starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up Perforation Skip e Disable Allows printing on page perforation e You may set up a skip over margin of 1 2 inch 2 3 inch 5 6 inch or 1 inch For example a skip over margin of 1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at the bottom of the page 82 LP Plus Emulation Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration will be loaded Disable The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and continues to use the currently loaded configuration Power Up Config The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is received Current Config If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations then the currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset command is received Factory Config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is received 83
216. nd is by sending a host command which will switch the emulation automatically See the appropriate Technical Reference Manual for more information on these command codes When changing from one IGP emulation to the other the printer will load the power up configuration Thus any setting performed before selecting those emulations and not saved in flash memory will be lost For more information on IGP PGL and Code V see the appropriate Technical Reference Manual Note i In order to configure an IGP emulation the IGP emulation must be selected in the ACTIVE EMULATION menu The IGP emulation that is not selected will not appear in the EMULATION menu 73 Chapter 4 Emulation Menu Emulation Menu 74 EMULATION PCL II LP PLUS IGP PGL amp IGP VGL LP CODE V amp LP see page 75 see page 80 seepage 97 see page 102 To view options press v Down a Up gt Next 4 Prev To select an option press ENTER To return to main menu press CLEAR To exit menu press ON LINE Default Setting 1 If installed The EMULATION menu is the gateway to configure the emulations available with the LineJet printer The control codes for each of these emulations are described in their respective Technical Reference Manuals PCL II Emulation Hewlett Packard s Printer Control Language that is compatible with Hewlett Packard systems LP PLUS Em
217. nds point your browser to the Print Server IP address The printer web pages should now be accessible If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer contact technical support Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup Problems Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup Problems The installation procedure covered earlier in this chapter assumes that the LineJet Print Server adapter is configured with the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway if required and that the administrator can ping and telnet to the LineJet Print Server adapter from the server console If this is not the case use the printer front panel to configure the LineJet Print Server adapter before proceeding The LineJet Print Server installation for Windows NT 4 0 also requires Microsoft TCP IP Printing service on the server To install this service click on the Network icon in the Control Panel and click on the Services tab Click on Add Service and select Microsoft TCP IP printing e Are you logged in as the Administrator This installation requires administrator privileges e LPR port is not listed in step 5 Cancel the installation and install Microsoft TCP IP printing service on the server e LPR configuration warning during step 6 LPR Port Configuration Warning x The LPD Server did not respond as expected to a test command Any of the following can cause this error The entry for IP Address or Queue name is in
218. neJet Print Server and use the debug Novell pserver command via a Telnet or npsh session or print the E Net Test Page out to make sure there is a successful server login Using either PCONSOLE in NDS mode or NWADMIN a create an NDS queue any name you want or simply use an existing one b create a print server to use any valid name or choose one already in existence 191 Chapter 10 Novell Host Configuration c create a printer object to use with the print server object you chose or created and attach it to the chosen queue Note The 4 1x queue name print server name and printer object don t have to match any LineJet Print Server name multiple printers can be defined but only one print server can be attached to 192 Example NDS queue name Finance NDS print server name Fin_Q NDS printer name Fin_Prt_1 NDS printer name Accounting Prt_1 At a 4 1x console session if a pserver nim session is already running for Fin_Q first unload it then reload it to find the new objects or simply issue load pserver Fin_Q If you are successful the print server console screen will show a printer status option In the printer status window note the numbers assigned to the printers you created Assume for our example that one printer previously existed number 0 and we are adding two more whose numbers became 1 and 2 On the load command you must strictly follow case of the name this is not
219. ness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard COPYRIGHT 2000 HEWLETT PACKARD CO All rights reserved Hewlett Packard Warranty Statement 1 HP warrants HP hardware accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or like new 2 HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due
220. net session from a TCP IP host to the LineJet Print Server e asingle remote shell command i e rsh remd remsh from a TCP IP host Main Command Shell Prefixes All configurable commands start with either store or set Troubleshooting commands usually start with debug and view commands start with list If the store prefix is used the LineJet Print Server must be repowered for the changes to take effect Since store affects flash memory settings only the print server must reset and read the new settings now in flash memory If the set prefix is used a save command must also be executed so that the new settings are retained after power cycles Since set only affects the settings in memory they will be lost after a power cycle unless they are saved to flash memory Getting Command Help The LineJet Print Server command shell provides several online help tools These include the following Command Typing when logged in to the command shell will produce a full listing of all commands available 219 Chapter 12 Complete Command List Command Prefixes Typing in the first portion of a command will produce an error message showing the correct syntax For example typing in store tcpip will produce a list of all commands that start with this prefix Complete Command List This section outlines the entire LineJet Print Server command set including the command syntax a description and in most cases an example
221. nfiguration 10 100Base T This section covers PSERVER and RPRINTER NPRINTER setups on the LineJet Print Server The LineJet Print Server can handle up to eight RPRINTER NPPRINTER setups Although the entire print setup is done through Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE you may need to communicate directly with the print server in order to modify settings monitor the unit etc For Netware 4 x environments you can obtain a NWAdmnsx snap in program called MPAdmin This snap in can be used to configure PSERVER setups as well as additional settings on the LineJet Print Server Note NWAdmn3x is only included with Netware 4 11 and higher releases If you are using Netware 4 10 you can either upgrade to Netware 4 11 or go to Novell s web site and get the patches to upgrade the Nwadmin program for Netware 4 10 to Nwadmn3x for Netware 4 11 Alternatively you can perform the setup without using MPAdmin NDS PSERVER Setup Netware 4 x There are a number of ways to configure the LineJet Print Server for use in a Novell NDS PSERVER setup These include using the MPAdmin snap in for Netware Administrator using generic print server objects in Netware Administrator or by using PCONSOLE The following steps describe a setup using generic print server object in Netware Administrator Setups using PCONSOLE are less common and will not be discussed To create a printer print queue in an NDS environment using Netware Administrator prin
222. nnel is set to prn for the diprn queue On an HP e3000 host prn must be listed under BACK for the d1prn queue so that Printer Job Language PUL will operate properly PUL must be operational for Page Level Recovery PLR to function The backchannel for the diprn printer queue can be set with a telnet session from a PC running a DOS session as shown below C telnet 15 31 40 147 Network Printer Server Version 1 1 3 15 31 40 147 login root Password carriage return Welcome root User 15 31 40 147 root gt set dest dlprn backchannel prn ok 15 31 40 147 root gt save 15 31 40 147 root gt exit 6 The npconfig pub sys file is loaded each time the spooler is started Verify the npconfig pub sys file contains the pj 1_supported snmp_enabled and data_timeout lines for each LineJet printer Here is a typical list of the npconfig pub sys entry for a LineJet npconfig pub sys listing Comments 6 NETWORK_ADDRESS 192 6 1 71 IP address no leading zeros tcp_port_number 9100 this line optional setup_file SETUP6 PUB SYS optional specific setup file for LDev 6 pjl_supported TRUE required for PJL to function snmp_enabled FALSE required data_timeout 30 required banner_header false optional turns off headers banner_trailer false optional turns off trailers 143 Chapter 7 _LineJet Print Server Configuration Verification The line setup_file filename is the file that
223. not change the configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the procedures in this chapter This chapter is a tutorial that explains how to configure the LineJet printer and LineJet Print Server Configuring The Printer In order to print data the printer must respond correctly to signals and commands received from the host computer Configuration is the process of matching the printers operating characteristics to those of the host computer and to specific tasks such as printing labels or printing on different sizes of paper The characteristics that define the printer s response to signals and commands received from the host computer are called configuration parameters A configuration consists of all the parameters under the Active Emulation Emulation Maint Misc Host Interface Printer Control and Diagnostics menus Chapter 4 describes the configuration submenus and their parameters in more detail You configure the printer by pressing keys on the control panel Figure 5 or by sending control codes from the host computer This chapter explains how to change parameters and save print and load configurations with the control panel All of the keys are described in detail in the LineJet Printers Quick Reference Guide which is shipped with each printer 39 Chapter 3 _ Configuring The Printer Cabinet Model Message Display Status Indicator 1m CLEAR UP SHIFT PREV One g
224. nt cceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 289 Agent Manager Model cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeenenaaes 289 MIB wcisnceie eels dedi lah ani iw eee 289 SNMP iiss staniiite tate Ane edt tam tee a ts 290 Monitoring Tool neser a e AA AE nhotaaiaepetbativiacis 291 Monitoring With AIX NetView 6000 ssssssssesssssrrssreerssrnen 291 Monitoring With Web JetAdmin eeeseeseeessesirsseerrrssrrrrresrnnnnss 291 OE BA E EN E E E E gatcrtey geubr uote sheaths 291 Setting The SNMP Community Name eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereen 291 Table of Contents 1 Introduction About This Manual This manual explains how to configure and perform routine service on the HP LineJet printer for maximum efficiency Warnings Cautions And Notes Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings Warning Warning messages call attention to situations that could hurt you or 7 damage the equipment Caution Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment Note A note gives you helpful hints about printer operation and maintenance Printing Conventions Used In This Manual e UPPERCASE print indicates control panel keys Example Press the CLEAR key then press the ON LINE key e Quotation marks indicate messages you see on the Liquid Crystal Display LCD Example Press the ON LINE key OFFLINE appears on the LCD e The plus symbol represents key c
225. nt Server Usually the packets value ranges from 2 to 8 with the lower number allowing for more simultaneous TCP connections with the print server store tcpip tcp opts keepalive disbufmgmt store tcpip tcp opts keepalive disbufmgmt Control whether the LineJet Print Server maintains a connection with a host when data cannot be accepted into its buffer Normally the keepalive feature is enabled so when the printer can not accept data the print job connection is maintained and continued once the situation clears If disbufmgmt is disabled i e the LineJet Print Server will Set Commands not buffer any data when there is a blocked situation with the printer Normally it is best to have both keepalive and disbufmgmt enabled store tcpip tcp access root add del IPaddress store tcpip tcp access add 192 75 11 25 Add or remove an entry from the LineJet Print Server TCP access list defined by IPaddress If the list has an entry only this host can print to and remotely interact with the print server store tcpip from default Set all TCP IP network settings back to factory defaults store tcpip from current Store all current TCP IP network settings to flash memory so they are retained after a power cycle This ensures all current settings match what is stored in flash memory Set Commands These settings alter the current or working settings in memory only Therefore they will be lost if the LineJet Print Server is pow
226. nter configurations 31 Chapter 2 Introduction Preparation For Downloading There are several function code files available for the LineJet printers The file you use depends on the model number of the printer and the printer emulation in use The latest version of function code includes software trouble report fixes and may contain additional features Note Always upgrade the function code to the latest version available that meets the minimum flash memory and DRAM SIMM sizes listed in Table 4 To verify what function code is already installed observe the control panel display when the printer is online and compare it with the listing in Table 4 If a configuration printout is available the function code file version is printed at the top of the configuration printout on the line that begins Program File Version For example if the line is Program File Version 2 07P Part No 356351 the number 356351 is the function code download file active at the time the configuration printout was generated You can download function code from a networked PC or laptop computer which contains the function code If the printer has the LineJet Print Server installed the internal network interface in most C320xD models the function code must be updated via the network to successfully update the LineJet Print Server firmware Loading function code via the network is done using the LineJet Printer Manager software on th
227. nvironments define groups of related computers as workgroups By default the LineJet Print Server belongs to the workgroup called WORKGROUP However you may want to change this to suit your network better To do this 1 Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL http LineJet IPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 Note i If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 Atthe Network Configuration HTML form that displays search for the Windows NetBIOS TCP IP section and highlight the Workgroup Name field 3 Type in the new workgroup name for the LineJet Print Server Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server to make the new settings take effect 151 Chapter 8 _ Windows LineJet Print Server Configuration Changing Destination Names When defining some printers within Windows environments the LineJet Print Server requires that you specify a pre defined destination rather than any name you would like For example when creating a new printer under Windows NT you are presented with a screen similar to Figure 11 Add LPR compatible printer Name or address of server providing Ipd EK Name of printer or print queue on that server Figure 11 Windows NT Print Setup Dialogue Box The first fi
228. o far up or too far down on the page or replaced use one of the methods below to set the paper position You can also defer printing or temporarily stop the spooler stopspool nn to ensure no print jobs will release Note LineJet printers have Line Feed LF Form Feed FF and Set TOF keys on the printer panel These keys are intended to be used to adjust paper position before the start of any print job When the HP e3000 spooler owns the printer the FF LF and Set TOF keys do not operate If you press any of these keys the message Invalid Key Press View displays If you want to check your output press the View key When the HP e3000 spooler does not own the printer these keys have their normal function Method 1 Place the printer offline from the control panel open the printer platen and manually roll paper back and forth as required via the knob on the tractor shaft To put the printer back into active service close the platen press CLEAR and place back online This procedure is safe at any time Method 2 Place the printer offline from the control panel Press and hold either the SHIFT Up arrow or SHIFT Down arrow to micro step the paper up or down as needed Place the printer back online Note The operation of the View key has been enhanced to include a new function Normally pressing the View key will move paper six inches up so the print can be viewed and a second depression of the
229. o select either the RS 232 the default or RS 422 serial port interface Serial Submenu Data Protocol You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host interface requirements e XON XOFF The default The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off In some situations such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too fast the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF character An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent the printer firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received When cleared the printer will resume receiving data XON The data does not have any End of Text codes XON XOFF is a non block protocol e ETX ACK End of Text Acknowledge The host controls the flow of communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text ETX signal When the printer receives the ETX signal it will acknowledge the ETX thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data e ACK NAK ACK means acknowledge the device acknowledges it has accepted a transmission NAK means a negative acknowledge the device did not receive the transmission e DTR Data Terminal Ready The printer
230. o view stored settings in flash memory you will need to add in stored within the beginning of any of the following commands For example List prn shows you the current prn settings but list stored prn shows you the settings sitting in flash memory Normally these should match list arp List the current ARP table that the LineJet Print Server adheres to ina TCP IP network list date List the current date on the LineJet Print Server list dest List the current destination settings e g names and mapped I O ports models and logpaths list diff List the differences between the current settings and the stored settings in flash memory Normally you want these values to match so issue a save command followed by a reset list ifc List the current UTP interface settings e g link integrity list key List the license details and license key number list logins List any active user logins on the LineJet Print Server list logpath List the current logpath settings e g names and mapped destinations list model List the current model settings e g names and mapped destinations list pserver List the current general print server settings e g print server name and Novell mode list prn List the current parallel port setting e g mode list rprinter List any current RPRINTER definitions Debug Commands list snmp List Trap Table containing SNMP Managers list sysinfo List the current LineJet Print
231. oaded file xxxxxx exe is a compressed executable file Leave the file as it is Do not try to execute the file 33 Chapter 2 Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer This section contains two loading techniques How to load function code through the parallel or serial port of the printer How to load function code through the Ethernet port using the file transfer protocol ftp Note If Ethernet is installed you must install the code through the Ethernet port using ftp 34 Loading Code Through The Parallel Or Serial Port 1 Installing new function code erases all saved printer configurations Make a printout of all saved configurations You will use the printouts to restore printer configuration Set the printer power switch to O off If the printer is already connected to the serial or parallel port of a computer running PC DOS or MS DOS go to step 9 If not go to step 4 Disconnect all data input cables from the printer interface Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial data cable to the COM1 port of an IBM compatible computer that is using the PC DOS or MS DOS operating system The computer must contain the function code to be downloaded You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port if the LPT1 is already in use Connect the data cable to the appropriate I O port of the printer Power on the computer
232. ombinations Example Press a v means to press the a UP key and the v DOWN key at the same time Chapter_ 1 About This Manual e Command syntax and examples are formatted as follows e The Courier font in boldface indicates commands that you type Example ping ftp HP com e Regular Courier font indicates displayed results Example ftp HP com is alive e Variable values are shown in italics in command syntax output and in text Example ping ipname Example ipname is alive Related Documents Following is a list of related documentation shipped with every LineJet printer e LineJet Printers Installation Instructions Cabinet and Pedestal Models Explains in a step by step process how to set up the printer for operation e LineJet Printers Quick Reference Guide Describes the keys on the control panel and provides quick reference information on daily printer operations such as loading paper and replacing ribbons Italian French German and Spanish are included Note This manual and the reference manuals listed below are located on the w LineJet Utilities CD shipped with your LineJet printer e LineJet Printers PCL II LinePrinter Plus Technical Reference Manual Describes the host control codes and character sets for the LinePrinter Plus and PCL II emulations e LineJet Printers QMS Code V Technical Reference Manual Explains how to write graphics programs using the option
233. on with the unit npsh unitname Starts a Telnet like session with the named print server with guest access only b To obtain root access to the unit type supervisor A standard login screen is displayed prompting you for the login name and password c Login to the unit as root user root Root users require the use of a password as configured in the unit user list d Enter the password If this password is not yet set press enter at the password prompt Otherwise enter the password that is already stored in the unit password You are now logged in to the unit as a root user and can access any npsh command on the unit Note Because npsh exe makes use of broadcasts you may have problems communicating across a router NetWare Version 4 x RPRINTER Setup LineJet Print Server can be configured to service both RPRINTER NDS mode and PSERVER bindery mode Use the following procedure to set up an RPRINTER form of attachment on a 4 x server jE LineJet Print Server requires a bindery server login on the 4 1x as the first step to servicing RPRINTER This bindery login is necessary for registering the LineJet Print Server PSERVER name no bindery queues or printers are set up Using PCONSOLE bindery mode create a bindery printer server object whose name matches that of the LineJet Print Server at the root context of the 4 1x box i e M_03092B After creating the bindery PrintServer on the 4 1x server reboot Li
234. on queue rather than a name of your own By default the LineJet Print Server only recognizes names like d1prn All other names will be ignored by the device Is the LineJet Print Server in Bindery mode as seen under the list pserver output on the device If servicing only a NetWare 4 x file server it must be set to handle Bindery services The default setting is Bindery Is there an available NetWare user license for the LineJet Print Server to use while it acts as a PSERVER Every PSERVER takes up one user license since it logs in to the Novell file server Have you given the connection process some time after repowering the LineJet Print Server In larger Novell environments the file server identification and connection process can take several minutes I Overview Novell Configuration For LO 100Base T Interfaces This chapter provides additional information for Novell environments using the 10 100Base T interface including 1 LineJet Print Server Configuration This section includes information about setting the preferred file server setting password security adjusting polling time changing the LineJet Print Server name changing the LineJet Print Server frame type changing the LineJet Print Server mode setting the LineJet Print Server NDS context and setting the LineJet Print Server preferred NDS tree Host Configuration This section includes information about the NDS PSERVER setup Bindery PSERVER s
235. on spools and carefully lift them off the hubs Raise the ribbon out of the ribbon path Using a soft bristled non metallic brush Such as a toothbrush brush paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors shuttle cover assembly base casting and ribbon guides Vacuum up the residue Caution Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to avoid damage 5 6 Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or ribbon lint Check the holes in the ribbon mask surrounding each hammer tip Gently remove paper or lint particles with a wooden stick or pair of tweezers Do not pry or apply force to the hammer tips Using a soft cloth lightly moistened with anhydrous alcohol no water remove dust and ink from the platen The platen is the thick silver bar behind the hammer bank cover that rotates when the forms thickness lever is rotated Clean the ribbon guides Caution When cleaning the platen be very careful not to get any alcohol in the hammer bank because alcohol will cause severe damage to the hammer bank Only a trained service technician should clean the shuttle assembly 252 10 11 Brush and vacuum up dust or residue that has accumulated inside the lower cabinet For cabinet models Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean lint free cloth dampened not wet with water and mild detergent or spray the surfaces lightl
236. onf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and add the name of the preferred file server in the File Server field 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re power the print server to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print Server s IP address followed by a colon then root ipaddress root gt 197 Chapter 11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration 10 100Base T 3 Atthe prompt enter store pserver novell fserver add fservername where fservername is the name of the Novell file server you want to add as a preferred file server This adds the specified file server as a preferred file server on the LineJet Print Server 4 Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect reset Removing Preferred File Server HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL ht
237. onformity Statement Zulassungsbescheinigung Gesetz Uber die elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit von Geraten EMVG vom 30 August 1995 Dieses Ger t ist berechtigt in bereinstimmung mit dem deutschen das EG Konformitatszelchen CE zu f hren Der AuBteller der Konformitatserklarung ist die Printronix 1 Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs 2 2 Das Ger t erf llt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 50082 1 und EN 55022 Klasse A EN 55022 Klasse A Ger te bed rfen folgender Hinweise Nach dem EMVG Ger te d rfen an Orten f r die sie nicht asreichend entst6rt sind nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesminesters f r Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes f r Post und Telekommunikation betrieben werden Die Genehmigung wird erteilt wenn keine elektromagnetischen St rungen zu erwarten sind Auszug aus dem EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs 4 Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung Amtsblatt 14 93 kostenpflichtig Nach der EN 55022 Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkst rungen verursachen in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden angemessene MaBnahmen durchzuf hren und daf r aufzkommen Anmerkung Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Ger te wie in den Handbichern angegeben zu installieren und zu betreiben This product has been tested and
238. ons can take considerable time depending on the size of the network Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output e Is there a large job currently printing taking up all of the printer resources Usually when printing from Windows 95 stations a busy printer can cause Windows to display a printer error message This is because it demands immediate printer attention rather than holding the data until the printer is ready again The best way around this is to use a central spooling station like an NT server e Have you tried restarting the spooler under Control Panel Services Sometimes this is needed to get printing started Note i As a last resort you may want to reboot the Windows station Sometimes this is the only option to completely clear this situation The LineJet Print Server usually has nothing to do with this problem 164 TCP IP Access Problem TCP IP Access Problem If you can ping the printer from a workstation but you cannot Web browse Telnet or print to the printer through the LineJet Print Server there may be an incorrect entry in the TCP access list In order for this workstation to use the LineJet Print Server interface in this case one of two things must happen 1 The TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this workstation 2 All entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all workstations hosts access to the above TCP services To view the current access list use
239. ont Attributes Typeface Prop Spacing Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Zero PCL II 0 Roman 8 8U 10 00 Data Processing 0 Roman 8 8U 10 00 Data Processing Inches Page 13 2 inches Enable 60 DPI Disable Disable isable isable isable nable isable LPI 6 Lines 1 0 Inches FPADUVUHAUUY Power Up Config 8 0 LPI Elongated CR CR Disable Enable LF CR LF 1 Enable Control Code ASCII USA Code Page 437 Even dot plot 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Data Processing Disable Disable Disable Disable Page Format Form Length Abs Length IN Abs Length MM Funct of lines Form Width Abs Width IN Abs Width MM Function of CPI Margins Left Margin Right Margin Bottom Margin Perforation Skip MAINT MISC Hex Dump Mode Power up State Display Language Power Stacker HOST INTERFAC Ethernet Buffer Size in K ETHERNET PARAMS IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask AC Address Novell Protocol NetBIOS Protocol Novell Frame PPM Port Number PPM Port Timeout Ethernet Speed PRINTER CONTROL Unidirectional PMD Fault Slow Paper Slew Power Saver Time DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests Test Width Paper Out Dots System Memory Print Statistics On Print Print Strokes Print Lines 11 inch Pages RIBBONMINDER New Ribbon Ribbon Action Ribbon Size Ribbon Adjust Fault Action Factory Default Configuration Values 11 0 inches 279 4 mm 66 lines
240. or sign With spooled 7 network printers such as LineJet printers unpredictable results will occur if the offset parameter is used with the or sign For example to suspend spooling and to position 7 pages from the beginning of the spool file enter the following command spooler 6 suspend offset 7 In this case the absence of a or sign indicates an absolute offset from the beginning of the spool file 146 Method 2 Because LineJet printers are typically connected to the network with a Print Server internal network card or JetDirect EX interface many of the spooler commands e g those described above should be avoided for mid file suspension This is because of two reasons 1 a great deal of data is buffered in the network process and must be completed and 2 the network connection can be dropped if the printer is ready to receive data but no data is being sent Refer to the HP e3000 MPE ix Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual Restarting at the point of interruption when a device exception occurs When a device exception occurs this is an unexpected recovery situation A device exception includes things such as paper jams load paper error etc Assume that the LineJet printer is connected to the network with a LineJet Print Server internal network card or an external JetDirect EX interface In order for PLR silent run to take place after a device exception and without specifying spooler comman
241. or Web browser sessions If you receive a reply received from message then proceed If you get a destination unreachable message or no reply from message recheck values and cables you have used Once you have established a positive ping response you may wish to use a browser to change or set items such as the workgroup name to match that of your client network or to change other values or names or check printer status To do this open your browser In the URL line enter the IP Address of the LineJet Print Server and press ENTER When the LineJet Web Page displays click on Configuration When prompted for a user name and ID enter root and press ENTER Press ENTER again for a blank password You may now change the workgroup name and other values If your web browser is set to use a proxy or you don t know use a telnet command session order to finish your setup using store and set commands refer to Chapter 12 Commands Use the following example of a telnet session to change the Windows workgroup name in the LineJet Print Server from workgroup the default to Acme 134 Assign TCP IP Values For Windows 95 98 NT or OS 2 open a DOS window For AS 400 start from a command prompt For Unix start from a terminal session prompt telnet xxx xxx XXX XXX login user root default user name for configuration anything default is no password welcome root user sample
242. orm Staple cuts must not be in the direction of form movement through the tractors Staples must not occur in line with the path of the tractor holes Staples should be placed in the margins so that they coincide with areas of the form where printing will not occur Cut To Tie Ratio Thickness Buildup in cm Typical ratio is 4 1 or 80 cut to 20 tie 283 Appendix B _ Form Design Checklist Note A cut to tie ratio that causes a thickness buildup greater than 0 025 in 0 0635 cm or that creates an evenness variation greater than K 0 003 in 0 00762 cm will result in an unreliable and unpredictable form 284 Perforation Intersections Horizontal vertical perforations are tie points Cut points at such intersections are unacceptable Chaff Content Tractor holes are clear of chaff There is no loose chaff in the box the paper is packed in Storage And Handling Summary Because it is impossible to test all possible forms available for use in the printer Hewlett Packard recommends that paper conform to the specifications outlined in this appendix for the best printer performance But the guidelines in this appendix are not a substitute for actual testing Always test forms including special single part paper multipart forms forms with glue strips carbonless forms card stock and labels for satisfactory feeding registration and print quality prior to purchase For best results in selectin
243. ost Setup Problems on page 167 159 Chapter 8 _ Windows Host Configuration Windows 95 98 Host Setup To configure a new printer on a Windows 95 station 1 Select Settings Printers from the Start menu 2 Double click on the Add Printer icon 3 Select Network Printer from the second window of the Add Printer wizard that loaded 4 At the next window click on BROWSE to help fill in the network path of this printer 5 At the Browse for Printer dialogue box that displays double click on the appropriate workgroup containing the LineJet Print Server By default the print server falls under the workgroup WORKGROUP 6 Continue searching the network until you see the LineJet Print Server name M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print server Ethernet address found when a configuration is printed 7 Once you see the LineJet Print Server double click on it to display a list of pre defined destinations queues to choose from Select a destination queue that will use diprn Click OK once you have selected a destination 10 Back at the network path window select NEXT since this path should now be filled in for you 11 At the next window select the appropriate print driver and click on NEXT 12 Fill in a name for this new network printer at the next window and decide if you want this to be the default printer This printer name can be anything you would like as long as i
244. ou instruct the printer to create characters If for example you select standard quality data processing mode the printer uses more dot rows to form characters than if you choose Sparse high speed mode Character formation and print speed are faster in Sparse mode because the printer prints fewer dot rows to form characters Vertical dot density is a factor in printing speed Nominal printing rates are charted in Appendix A 27 Chapter 1 _LineJet Print Server LineJet Print Server The LineJet Print Server allows you to attach printers on a local area network LAN rather than attaching them directly to a host system Following simple configuration steps these peripherals can be simultaneously shared with users on the network whether you are using TCP IP NetBIOS over TCP IP or IPX Novell The LineJet Print Server contains a network interface card to attach itself and the printer to the network This Ethernet 10 100Base T interface connector is what allows the printer to communicate with the network and the interface itself has a number of options status indicators and switches which are described in Print Server Interface on page 29 What Special Features Are Available The LineJet Print Server offers an extensive list of features including e built in HTML forms for easy cross platform configuration e availability of printer manager software e a detailed and easy to use command shell built in to the fir
245. ou use the control panel you can save the parameters as a customized configuration A configuration consists of a group of parameters A saved configuration will not be lost if you turn off the printer You can change a parameter with a control code but to save the parameter setting you must use the control panel Control codes override control panel parameters For example if you set the line spacing to 6 Ipi with the control panel and application software later changes this to 8 Ipi with a control code the control code setting overrides the control panel setting The 8 lpi parameter is effective as long as the printer is on If you turn off the printer the 8 lpi parameter will be erased To save the parameter you must use the control panel and save it as a configuration You can save up to eight configurations Changing parameters is described on page 48 and saving configurations is described on page 50 43 Chapter 3 44 Configuring The Printer Factory Default Configuration Values The factory default values are permanently stored in memory as a configuration and cannot be modified or erased The configuration values for the Bi Tronics parallel interface and Print Server Ethernet interface are displayed on the following pages Bi Tronics Parallel Interface ACTIVE EMULATION PCL II Primary Char set ID Symbol Set Pitch Density Second Char set ID Symbol Set Pitch Density Page Length R
246. ound Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER This status message appears when the printer is first powered on if the optional LineJet Print Server interface is installed None Engineer 1 Before contacting a Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer power off the printer wait 15 seconds then power it back on and rerun your print job If the message reappears press CLEAR If the fault message still displays then contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service 266 A Printer Specifications And Regulatory Information Ribbon Specifications Use only these Hewlett Packard ribbons in LP Series and LineJet printers Kit No Ribbon Type ae Part No C3207A 60 yard text ribbon 6 C3207 60001 C3208A 100 yard text ribbon 6 C3208 60001 C3209A 60 yard bar code OCR ribbon 6 C3209 60001 C3210A 100 yard bar code OCR ribbon 6 C3210 60001 C3212A 60 yard security ribbon 6 C3212 60001 Note Before June 2000 all printers were shipped with one box of six C3209A l 60 yard OCR optical character recognition ribbons For maximum ribbon K life when barcodes or OCR are not being printed order the 60 yard text ribbon product C3207A as replacement for pedestal model printers and the 100 yard text ribbon product C3208A as replacement for the cabinet models Starting at the end of June 2000 LineJet printers shipped with
247. pecify which of the nine configurations 0 8 will be the power up configuration The factory default for power up is configuration 0 See page 56 for a detailed description and sample procedure Protect Configs Allows you to specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an existing configuration when you activate the Save Config parameter e Disable The default The new configuration will overwrite the existing configuration Enable The new configuration will not overwrite the existing configuration and the message CONFIG EXISTS Delete First displays You must delete the existing configuration 1 8 before trying to save the new configuration Active Emulation Menu ACTIVE EMULATION PCL II LP PLUS IGP PGL amp IGP VGL LP CODE V amp LP The ACTIVE EMULATION menu determines what emulations are available PCL II The default The PCL II emulation is active LP PLUS Allows you to select LinePrinter Plus as the active emulation If LP PLUS is the active emulation you can select Epson Proprinter III XL or P Series as the printer protocol see page 80 IGP PGL amp LP and IGP VGL Code V amp LP The ACTIVE EMULATION function also allows you to activate either the PGL or the Code V emulation There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the printer menu The seco
248. physical printer can only be attached to one parallel or serial port at a time Thus if you assign a printer object to another print server object the new print server object will steal it from the old one this also happens with non LineJet Print Server print server objects In order to properly process print jobs sent to the LineJet Print Server the printer object created in Novell must refer to the destination on this server and not to the actual physical printer On the LineJet Print Server print jobs must pass through an extra layer a destination before being sent on to the printer This destination allows for further processing of the print job before sending it to the printer If you are using multiple print servers you will have to either rename all your destinations to ensure that no printer object names conflict or keep all the printer objects for one print server in a different context than those for the other print server 11 Select Define additional properties and click on Create 12 Click on Assignments in the dialogue that pops up and then on the Add button 13 Select the queue you defined earlier or browse for a different one 14 Click on OK to assign this queue to this printer 15 Click on OK to close the Printers details dialogue and make the changes permanent 16 Click on a branch in the tree i e context that you would like to create the LineJet Print
249. printer on a LAN rather than attach the host directly into the printer Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet buffer The default is 16 Kbytes You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments 117 Chapter 4 118 Auto Switching Host Interface Menu Auto Switching Submenu Factory Default from page 110 Parallel Serial Hotport Hotport Port Type Port Type Bi Tronics RS 232 Centronics RS 422 Ethernet Disable Disable Trickle Time Trickle Time 1 4 sec 1 4 sec 1 2 sec 1 2 sec 1 sec 1 sec 2 sec 2 sec 4 sec 4 sec 8 sec 8 sec 16 sec 16 sec Off Off Timeout Timeout 10 sec 10 sec 1 60 1 60 Report Status Report Status Disable Disable Enable Enable Auto Switching Gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially With Auto Switching the printer can service hosts attached to the serial and parallel ports as if they were the only interface connected For example if the host computer sends one print job to the RS 232 serial port and a separate print job to the Bi Tronics parallel port the printer s Auto Switching is able to handle both jobs in the order they were received without the user having to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs Port Type Allows you to select the types of parallel and or serial interfaces which are connected to the printer
250. printer to indicate the printer is in a fault condition Busy A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive data Centronics Parallel Interface Configuration Your printer is configured at the factory to match the interface you specified By using the operator panel you may verify and change several interface parameters in order to meet specific application requirements Refer to Centronics Parallel Submenu on page 112 for Centronics parameter descriptions and information on selecting values for the following parameters e Data Bit 8 enable or disable e Data Polarity standard or inverted e Strobe Polarity standard or inverted e Response Polarity standard or inverted e Busy on Strobe enable or disable e Latch Data On Leading or Trailing Edge of Strobe e Prime Signal enable or disable e TOF Action at Prime Signal do nothing or form feed e O Buffer Size 1 6 Some application programs require a unique configuration If the printer is not working properly in the configuration you have selected contact a Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 243 Chapter 14 _Bi Tronics Parallel Interface Bi Tronics Parallel Interface 244 Bi Tronics is a parallel interface with bidirectional capabilities Features include the following e Timing of the signals has been reduced thereby speeding data transmission Bidirectional communication Both the host and the print
251. printing the configuration 52 saving 43 Parity error handling 250 PARITY ERROR message 264 Parity parameter 116 Passwords 235 setting 235 Peer to peer networks 129 Perforation Skip 82 Perforation skipping setting with control panel 77 Phase value test 124 PI Control 108 PI Ignored parameter 112 PI Slew Range 98 Pin assignments RS 232 serial interface 248 RS 422 serial interface 248 Pinout signals Bi Tronics interface 246 PLAT INV CMD message 264 PLAT INV PARM message 264 PLAT INV STATE message 264 PMD Fault parameter 122 Port Type 118 Power consumption printer 270 Power On IGP PGL 99 POWER SAVER MODE message 264 Power saver time parameter 122 Power Stacker parameter 109 POWERSUPPLY HOT message 264 Power up configuration 56 Configuration parameter 72 State parameter 109 PPS Printronix Printing System 160 Predefined configurations 42 Prefixes Command 220 Primary Character Set 77 Prime Signal parameter 111 Centronics 113 Print Char Set 81 Print Configuration parameter 72 Print error log test 124 Print job servers 130 Print quality 24 Print Statistics parameter 125 Printer logging 238 monitoring 238 specifications and regulatory 267 Printer architecture 21 Printer control menu 121 PRINTER HOT message 264 Printer Manager utility 120 Printer monitoring MIB 289 SNMP 290 tools 291 Printer Protocol 81 Printer Select 90 93 Printer settings changing 39
252. ptable Chaff Content Tractors holes should be clear of chaff As much as possible there should not be loose chaff in the box in which the paper is packed 281 Appendix B _ Form Design Checklist Form Design Checklist 282 Use this checklist to help you remember key areas of consideration when designing and ordering forms and paper stocks Environment Before they are used forms are given at least 24 hours of condensing time in the environment in which they will be used Forms are not stored in environments that result in damage such as delamination of glue lines creasing folding etc Type Of Form Form Type Check One 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 6 Part lt Carbonless Range gt lt Carbon Range gt Recycled Paper Yes No If yes assure adequate form strength to prevent tractor holes and perforations from tearing or detaching during form feeds and page ejects Security Form Yes No If yes the last page of the form should have a minimum 50 reflectance and if possible the stippled page faces inward to the form Form Weight Form weight Minimum 15 Ib 6 8 kg Maximum 100 Ib 45 36 kg Form Thickness Form thickness 0 025 inches 0 0635 cm maximum measured at the thickest point of the form which includes perforations compressed staples glue lines etc Fo
253. quests for IP addresses upon bootup If you are storing the LineJet Print Server TCP IP network settings within the device you will not need to rely on RARP BOOTP or DHCP for new settings store tcpip ifnum frametype ethernet2 802 2snap store tcpip 1 frametype ethernet2 802 2snap Control which frame type s is supported with the TCP IP protocol By default both ethernet2 and 802 2snap are enabled but normal TCP IP communications rely on Ethernet 2 This setting has no affect on other supported network protocols e g Novell store tcpip route add del host net IPaddress ifnum store tcpip route add net 192 75 12 0 1 store tcpip route del net 192 75 12 9 1 Add or delete a static route to a particular TCP IP host or subnet specified by IPaddress so the LineJet Print Server knows how to communicate with it Normally one entry for a default router gateway is all that is needed for communications between different subnets Please see the next command for details store tcpip route add del default routerIPaddress ifnum store tcpip route add default 192 75 11 11 Store a default router gateway defined by routerIPaddress so the LineJet Print Server knows where to direct packets destined for another subnet It is easier to store one default entry rather than an entry per remote host or network as in the previous command store tcpip tcp rxwin packets store tcpip tcp rxwin 2 Determine the receive window size for the LineJet Pri
254. r example MyLineJet c For Remote Printer Name enter a dest on the LineJet for example diprn d Accept defaults for Remote Cancel model and Remote Status model e Check the box next to Remote Printer is on a BSD system f Click on OK You will be asked if you want to add the new printer to HP Vue this is optional Other optional choices include making this the system printer and allowing anyone to cancel a job Test your new printer by either a command line print lp d Accounting etc inetd conf or via an application which can be directed to a selected printer Printing Setup On HP UX Method 2 Command Line The following procedure requires root privilege PON Assume a print queue aka Unix printer Quality is desired DNS IP Address name of LineJet Print Server is MyLineJet The dest d4prn is to be used on the LineJet Print Server The default BSD interface file rmodel on the HP UX system will be used Issue the following commands in order shown lpshut stops the print scheduler lpadmin pQuality mrmodel v dev null ormMyLineJet orpd4prn ob3 sets up queue lpsched restarts print scheduler accept Quality allows queue to accept jobs enable Quality allows queue to pass jobs Explanation of command line m indicates the model rmode1 is to be associated with Quality v indicates the use of dev null as a file interlock to avoid contention orm is the name of remote Print
255. rench Canadian Latin Am II OCR A OCR B Latin 2 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Cyrillic 866 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859 15 Polish POL1 Multinational ASCII USA EBCDIC DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 PC851 LtGk 12G Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G IBM PC 89 Chapter 4 90 Emulation Menu Define CR Code The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex OA into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer e CR CR Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return Auto LF This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width Define LF Code The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code hex OA from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Line Feed it inserts an additional Carriage Return code hex OD into the data stream This feat
256. required on the LineJet Print Server Via a Telnet or npsh session create RPRINTER attachments store rprinter add Fin_Q 1 dlprn This command assigns destination dlprn as the RPRINTER 1 service path store rprinter add Fin_Q 2 d4prn This command assigns destination d4prn as the RPRINTER 2 service path For LineJet Print Server entries case does not have to be observed Also if you want to change the destination names from dxprn do so first with the set dest dest name new name command being sure to use the save command so these reappear after a reboot Reboot the LineJet Print Server adapter power the printer off and on or use the reset command so the new RPRINTER service names are broadcast Open a Telnet or npsh session and log into LineJet Print Server Wait a minute or two then use the list rprinter command and you should see your entries You could also do this by looking at the connection status on the 4 1x PSERVER printer status entries If you add delete or change RPRINTER entries on LineJet Print Server or 4 1x console you should always unload and reload the pserver nim module to register the changes The LineJet Print Server can be configured and ready before the pserver nim is reloaded or LineJet Print Server can be reset after pserver nim is reloaded A web browser can also be used to see the RPRINTER attachments etc and status NetWare 3 x No PSERVER Connection Novell Troubleshooting Tips This
257. rinter Type File Name Line Speed 9600 300 through 38400 Record Width 132 1 2048 bytes Modem Type 0 0 None 1 US 2 Europe Parity NONE None Even Odd 0 s 1 s Initially Spooled Y Y N Device Class user s choice Save Data Prior Screen twice Go to DTC Config Card Assign Profile to LDEV Save Data Validate Link DTX After successful Validation run SYSGEN to cross validate the DTS configuration with the system configuration In order for any TIO changes to take effect you must reboot the system Within SYSGEN sysgen gt io io gt LD io gt HO sysgen gt K Keep configuration Note Ensure that the LineJet Printer configuration matches the system baud w rate and parity 148 8 Windows Configuration Overview This chapter details a complete Windows configuration setup including 1 Identifying the LineJet Print Server on the network using TCP IP as the underlying protocol 2 Configuring the LineJet Print Server with its mandatory TCP IP settings IP address and subnet mask 3 Configuring a new printer on the Windows station Windows Environment Description The LineJet Print Server card supports network printing under Windows environments by using TCP IP In a Windows NT setup pure TCP IP is used as the network protocol whereas with Windows 95 or Windows 98 NetBIOS over TCP IP is used Figure 10 shows two of the most common Windows setups you
258. rintf WAITING_FOR_JOB If you see these lines the LineJet Print Server is setup properly and the problem points to a setup issue on the workstation e If the LineJet Print Server has logged in to the file server but has not attached to the queue there may be a permission problem Make sure the appropriate users have rights to this queue they should be in the group everyone Also you may have to assign the queue to root so it is available to everyone e Did you rename any objects in Netware Administrator during your setup Netware Administrator seems to have problems renaming objects If so delete everything and start over If none of these solutions help your situation you may want to try the whole setup again Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go through the setup again following each step carefully Note Be sure to reboot the printer before beginning a new setup and after completing a PSERVER setup Wait at least a minute for the Print Server to log in and attach to a queue RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup If there is no connection with the LineJet Print Server after you have completed the print setup there are several things to confirm Note The debug information that is mentioned in the section can be found by either telneting to the LineJet Print Server and issuing the commands given or launching a browser to the Novell status page on the LineJet Print Server e g http 192
259. rints lowercase characters received from the host computer as their corresponding uppercase equivalents uppercase characters received from the computer are printed as uppercase Slew Relative Slewing is rapid vertical paper movement This parameter determines the number of lines slewed either 1 15 lines or 1 16 lines when an EVFU Slew Relative command is received IGP PGL Emulation IGP PGL Emulation The IGP PGL emulation can be configured either through the printer s front panel or from the host computer with control codes For a detailed description of configuration with control codes see the PGL Programmer s Reference Manual For information on configuring the emulation through the printer s front panel see the submenu below and the parameter descriptions that follow EMULATION from page 74 Factory Default IGP PGL amp LP Define CR Define LF Autowrap Select SFCC PI Slew CR Edit Code Code Range CR CR LF LF Disable 126 16 Disable CR CR LF LF CR LF Enable 1 255 15 Enable Select Font Select LPI Auto Skip Cmd Power on Ext Execute Uppercase Prefix IGP PGL Copy 0 6 0 Disable Enable Enable Disable 1 31 8 0 Enable Disable Disable Enable 9 0 10 0 UPC Compressed Ignore Char IGP100 Optimized Er
260. rm Evenness The evenness of the form Not to exceed 0 003 in 0 00762 cm Tenting due to buildup of perforation thickness must be minimized A perforation thickness measured at the major perforation that exceeds 1 25 times the forms thickness measured in the print area will result in an unreliable and unpredictable form Perforation thickness must not exceed the maximum form thickness of 0 025 in 0 0635 cm Tractor Pin Holes Chaff Content The holes which engage the tractor pins must conform to the following specifications hole CL to righthand hole CL Specification Inches Millimeters Hole centerline CL to edge of form 0 236 0 028 6 0 0 1 Hole Diameter Serrations or any 0 156 0 004 4 0 0 1 occlusion due to incorrect registration of multipart forms cannot exceed this dimension Distance between centers of two 0 500 0 002 12 7 0 05 consecutive holes Maximum deviation of holes from their 0 004 0 1 centerline Maximum deviation of lefthand hole to 0 006 0 15 adjacent righthand hole CL to CL Maximum parallel deviation of lefthand 0 006 0 15 Methods Of Forms Attachment Must not allow air entrapment between copies of the form Must not use hard brads or staples Must not coincide with major perforation or any horizontal perforation Gluing lines must not result in a form that exceeds 0 025 in 0 0635 cm thickness Staples must be used only in margin area of f
261. ror Report Descenders CPI Compaibl Ratio Enable Disable Ignore Mode Disable Disable On Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Debug Mode Enable Fault Select Char Off 0 0 255 Define CR Code Carriage Return This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs This is to be used only if the host computer does not send Line Feeds to the printer CR CR Does not perform a line feed The next print position will be print position 1 of the current line CR CR LF Performs an automatic line feed The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line 97 Chapter 4 98 Emulation Menu Define LF Code Line Feed This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs This can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer e LF LLF Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e LF CR LF Performs an automatic carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Autowrap This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin e Disable Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR LF
262. rver knows about a print job but is waiting for the host to send more data or to send an expected packet Printer Logging Through Logpaths Printer Logging Through Logpaths Destinations are logical queues with associated models and logpaths Models allow extra processing needed with the print jobs Logpaths are used if logging is desired for each job Each logpath on the LineJet Print Server consists of two parts Type The type of log information to be captured The choices are job for job ID and username user for user ID and three messages per job pgent for total pages printed in a job cksum for file checksums printer for special printer feedback and ioport for parallel printer status messages Port Where this log information will be sent to The choices are a TCP port number e g 2000 an email address including an alias or a central host running a SYSLOG daemon To view the current logpath settings on the print server you can use either Telnet or a Web browser as follows Telnet Using Telnet type the commands and your variable data as shown in the example below Syntax list logpath list logpath logpath set logpath logpath port ioport set logpath logpath type user job save Example 10 221 1 25 root gt list logpath NAME LOG PORT LOG FLAGS 11 E 12 13 14 10 221 1 25 root gt list logpath 12 log port log flags 10 221 1 25 root gt set logpath 12 port 9
263. s cc ccccccccccsccecceessesesseseeceeeeeeeseneees 269 Electrical Characteristics ccccccccssssseceseeeeeecceessessaeeaeceeeeeseeeneeees 270 Material Safety Data Sheets 0 ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeees 271 Communication Notices ccccccccccccceeeeeeceeseceeeececeseeaeaueseeeeeeeaeanees 272 Table of Contents B Paper Specifications And Forms Desighn 275 INtrOGUCTION ieis j eee eee li NE N EE 275 General Paper Specifications ceccccesesceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeaes 276 Paper Guidelines ccccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeecaaeseeaeeeseaeetenaeeens 277 Terms And Definitions 000 ec eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeees 277 Environmental Considerations cccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneeesees 279 FORTIN TYPOS eaa E ar AA TE E a Gas he ity 279 Forni Weigher a a eed een be tie E AE 279 Form THORNES Sei nn a e aa a 279 FOrM Evene SS aa iea EAEE EA 279 Tractor Pin Engagement ensues E 279 Methods Of Forms Attachment n s 280 Chaff Contents 22 stnendiei ian i a A 281 Form Design Checklist ccccccccceeseeeceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeseeneeesecaeeeenaeeee 282 AS1U a ate N aa aa a reer erect E A a a REE aa 285 Storage And Handling ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeneneees 285 C Standard ASCII Character Set 287 D Monitoring Printers ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 289 Implementing Printer Manageme
264. s Inc Copyright 1991 1999 Wyndham Technologies Inc ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute Inc Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation DEC is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation DG UX is a registered trademark of Data General Corporation EIA is a registered trademark of the Electronic Industries Association ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency As an ENERGY STAR Partner Hewlett Packard has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation Frontier Technologies and SuperTCP are trademarks or registered trademarks of Frontier Technologies Corporation FTP Software and OnNet are trademarks or registered trademarks of FTP Software Inc IGP PGL LinePrinter Plus PrintNet and Printronix are registered trademarks and RibbonMinder is a trademark of Printronix Inc IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics Inc LINUX is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Magnum and QMS are registered trademarks and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro Systems Inc Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PKZIP and PKUNZIP are registered trademarks of PKWARE Inc NetManage and Chameleon are
265. s MIB are not applicable to the NIC The complete definition of the Printer MIB is provided in the Printer MIBs in DOS Format and Printer MIBs in TAR Format which are shipped with the NIC The MIB is provided in a subset of the ASN 1 syntax The Printer MIB is composed of the following sections e General e Cover e Localization e Input e Output e Marker e Media Path e Channel e interpreter Console e Alert Information Provided by the MIB The Printer MIB contains the following types of information about network printers Descriptions Printer configuration location and contact Status Current operating status of printers Alerts Reportable events from printers SNMP SNMP is the network protocol used to communicate between manager and agent Managers request information usually through automated polling at specified intervals and agents respond Though used primarily on TCP IP networks SNMP can be implemented on other protocols for example IPX SNMP is a standard by which a network manager can get statistics and configuration information from the NICs and other devices on the network This is done through a Network Management Station NMS such as OpenView and NetView Monitoring With AIX NetView 6000 Monitoring Tools Many tools can be used to monitor printers with SNMP agents One of these tools is NetView There are also other MIB browsers which are not described here Monitoring Wit
266. s you have an existing network and TCP IP attached to a Windows 95 98 NT Unix or other machine You will configure network printing by adding the necessary TCP IP values to the LineJet Print Server and associating the Print Server as an output port for a Windows printer on a 95 98 NT client or server or to a print queue or logical printer in Unix AS 400 or HP e3000 Before You Begin 1 You must obtain the IP address and subnet mask to be used for the LineJet Print Server In addition a gateway value may be needed A gateway is a device that knows how to find other TCP IP devices on other sections of the network that may need to know about the LineJet printer 2 The NetBEUI NetBIOS protocol may be used to define the network port for a Windows printer for example Use the following sequence Start Settings Printers Add network printer network path or queue name NetBEUI NetBIOS does not route which means you must use it on a single network segment but this setup is ideal for a single network or a small network 131 Chapter 6 _ TCP IP LineJet Print Server Configuration Creating Aliases All TCP IP systems are designed to make multiple operations easy by using an alias which is a logical name to IP MAC address association This step is important in the Unix world if DNS Domain Name Services is being used it can also simplify the other environments Locate the hosts file If you are using Windows 95 98 and ha
267. seepage 92 see page 95 80 To view options press v Down a Up gt Next 4 Prev To select an option press ENTER To return to main menu press CLEAR To exit menu press ON LINE Default Setting LP Plus Emulation Printer Protocol Select the LinePrinter protocol you wish to use Refer to the PCL II LinePrinter Plus Technical Reference Manual for more information Print Char Set When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed the current character set is printed CPI LPI Select This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch cpi value and lines per inch lpi value Font Attributes Typefaces e Data Processing A general purpose font printing out at 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically The width of the font will vary with each cpi e NLQ A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically This font has serifs and the width of the font varies with the cpi e OCR A OCR B Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 144 dpi vertically Both fonts print only at 10 cpi e High Speed A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi vertically The width of the font varies with the cpi e NLQ Sans Serif A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically This font prints without serifs The width of the font varies with the cpi Prop Spacing Each printed charact
268. select a font for the IGP VGL Code V feature The default is 0 which is U S ASCII The following values are valid choices U S ASCII United Kingdom Swedish Finnish Norwegian Danish Japanese German French Italian Spanish PC Subset 0 Code V Version S OONDOORWN O PI Control Printer Pl e Disable The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line disabled e Enable The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled Host Pl e Disable The host does not send PI signals e Enable The host sends PI signals The Data Bit 8 configuration option must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer Max PI 16 e Enable A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines e Disable A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will always move 1 line 108 Maint Misc Menu Maint Misc Menu MAINT MISC Hex Dump Power up Display Power Mode State Language Stacker Disable Online English Enable Enable Offline Italian Disable French F Gorman To view options press Spanish v Down gt Next 4 Prev To select an option press ENTER To return to main menu press CLEAR To exit menu press ON LINE Default Setting If installed Maint Misc Menu Hex Dump Mode A hex code printout or hex dump translates all incoming data to hexadecimal equivalents A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the host computer toge
269. sinfo descramblekey 1234 Set the key value used for descrambling print jobs that have passed through the npscramble utility on a TCP IP host This key is a four digit hexadecimal value obtained from the host software noscramble Within the npscramble source code there is a variable called SR_KEY which contains the default key value This can be changed to any four digit value you would like Set Commands set sysinfo module novell netbios set sysinfo module novell Enable and disable certain network protocol stacks within the LineJet Print Server Sometimes it helps to disable any protocols you are not using on your network set time hours minutes seconds set time 10 30 Set the current time noting the hours based on the 24 hour system and the minutes and seconds ranging from 0 through 59 If the LineJet Print Server is reset this value will be lost so you will need to set the time again set user add del username set user add eng Add or remove a user on the LineJet Print Server defined by username Note Be careful not to delete the root user or you will be unable to configure w any further settings on the print server You will have to go back to factory defaults to correct this problem set user passwd username password set user passwd eng mplex1 Assign a password to a defined user on the LineJet Print Server This password must be less than eleven characters set user type username root guest set us
270. sing through By default banner pages are added to the front of the job If after is set the banner page will come at the end set model model stty Jonlcr descramble xtab tablength none set model m3 stty onlcr Control extra job processing done by the model The processing options are onlcr Carriage return insertion for Unix text jobs Adds carriage returns to text jobs with solitary linefeeds This will prevent stair stepped output or output running off the right side of the page descramble Automatic descrambling of print jobs passing through which have been scrambled using the proprietary scramble Unix utility npscramble xtab Tab expansion from 1 to 16 spaces 225 Chapter 12 Complete Command List 226 set model model trailer trailerstring set model m7 trailer SFF Set a trailer string to be sent to the printer at the end of any print jobs passing through this model trailerstring can consist of up to nine elements An example element is a hexadecimal code e g 0x04 ora pre defined variable on the print server e g FF for a formfeed Use list var to see all available variables set model from default Set all model settings back to factory defaults set model from stored Set all current model settings to the values stored in flash memory set prn autofd set prn autofd Assert or do not assert the AUTOFD line for carriage return insertion This only affects printers that support this functio
271. smission Byte Mode The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines one bit per line If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host the host will take control of the data transfer The Negotiation Phase The Negotiation Phase The negotiation phase determines which operating mode will be used At this time the host and the printer will sense what devices are attached the supported signals available and which mode to use The selected mode in turn defines the pins on the Bi Tronics interface connector There are 36 pins on the parallel interface Each one sends a different signal Pin 1 for example can send a Strobe signal or a HostClk signal depending on the mode selected Table 16 shows the different definitions Signals Bi Tronics interface signals between the host and the printer are defined below Host Clock nWrite Driven by the host Data is transferred from host to printer When the printer sends data two types are available In Nibble mode the signal is set high In Byte mode the signal is set low Data 1 through Data 8 These pins are host driven in Compatibility mode and bidirectional in Byte mode They are not used in Nibble mode Data 1 is the least significant bit Data 8 is the most significant bit Printer Clock Peripheral Clock Interrupt Driven by the printer A signal from the printer indicating the character or function code has been receiv
272. snaeeesaes 161 Table of Contents Windows Troubleshooting TipS ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeaees 163 LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On The Network 163 HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display 0 ceseee 163 Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer s es 164 Cannot Browse The LineJet Print Server Card On The Network 164 Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output ccceeeeeeees 164 TCP IP Access Problem cccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeseueeessnanereaes 165 Web Browser HTTP Problem ccccescceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166 Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup Problems cccceeeeeeeeeeeees 167 9 Unix Configuration ce seesdeoscccectisbnceceronecdaceeennenane 169 OVEIVIOW a hine aad aeaa a a a aaa aaa aiai 169 Unix Environment Description asssssessssrreesserreesrrnneesrrnnensrnnnnesrnnnnenne 170 Unix LineJet Print Server Configuration 171 Mandatory oiro cl a a ee 171 Optional ia cesses bed ices acetes BOstes a anii ia adunata Ainai a rataan 171 Communicating Across ROUtelS cccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeees 171 Unix Host Configuration sassanida ineine renra iia kreii 172 Printing Setup On HP UX sseeeeseeeeresrrsssrrssrrssrrssrrsrernsrressree 172 Printing Setup ON Sys V ssssssssessssssssnsssrnessrssrresrsnssrresrressreessnns 175 LPR LPD Printing Setup On BSD Systems Sun 4 x DEC Ultrix Free BSD etc ec eecceeeeeeesttee
273. ss to the LineJet Print Server upon bootup In addition the BOOTP server can provide additional details such as a default router gateway address To configure the LineJet Print Server with its TCP IP settings using BOOTP complete the following steps 1 On your BOOTP server make an entry in the etc bootptab file for the LineJet Print Server Syntax LineJetIPname sm netmask hd homedirectory bf null gw defaultgateway ht ethernet sha ethernetaddress ip ipaddress ts timeserver to timezone Example spike sm 255 255 255 0 hd usr null bf null gw 192 75 11 1 ht ethernet ha 008072070060 ip 192 75 11 9 ts 192 75 11 7 to 25200 137 Chapter 6 _ TCP IP LineJet Print Server Configuration 2 Turn the LineJet Print Server on so that it immediately sends out a BOOTP request Wait one minute to allow the IP address assignment process to complete You should see the STAT LED on the LineJet Print Server interface slow down indicating it knows about an IP address to use 3 Try to ping the LineJet Print Server IP address from a network station to see if it can be seen on your network Note You will be able to communicate with the LineJet Print Server from l network stations on different subnets if the print server has been told about K its default router gateway in the BOOTP response from the BOOTP server 138 HP c3000 LineJet Print Server Confi
274. ssignments Input Signals Signal Pin Output Signals Signal Pin Miscellaneous Signal Pin Receive Data RD 3 Clear To Send CTS 5 Data Set Ready DSR 6 Data Carrier Detect DCD 8 Transmit Data TD Request To Send RTS Data Terminal Ready DTR 2 4 20 Chassis Ground 1 Signal Ground 7 Table 18 RS 422 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data RD 15 Transmit Data TD 19 Chassis Ground 1 Receive Data RD 17 Transmit Data TD 25 Signal Ground 7 248 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interface Signals RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interface Signals The RS 232 RS 422 connector mounted on the printer is a 25 pin DB 25S type The mating connector is a DB 25P RS 232 and RS 422 compatible serial interface signals are defined as follows RS 232 Transmitted Data TD Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selection Received Data RD Serial data stream to the printer Request To Send RTS Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration Clear To Send CTS Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready to receive data status signals from the printer Data Set Ready DSR Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ina ready condition Da
275. st You must reset the top of form See your LineJet Printers Quick Reference Guide oe An example procedure for running the self test All E s which determines whether print quality is acceptable is described in Table 19 Table 19 Sample Print Test All E s Step Key Result Notes 1 Install the ribbon Load full width 136 column computer paper Set top of form See your Quick Reference Guide 2 ON LINE OFFLINE Abe printer must be offline for CONFIG CONTROL eeu 3 a UO ENTER SWITCH ers you to make configuration UNLOCKED cnanges OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL i gt UNTIL OFFLINE DIAGNOSTICS z y DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests 6 Y UNTIL DIAGNOSTICS Test Width if Test Width N V Full Width 255 Chapter 15 Diagnosing Problems Table 19 Sample Print Test All E s continued Step Key Result Notes 8 Cycle through the choices e P X Full Width or 80 columns 9 ENTER Test Width The width you have chosen will be x used for the printer test 1 DIAGNOSTICS A UNTIL Test Width 11 m UNTIL DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests 12 J Printer Tests Shift Recycle i C ol N Printer Tests All E s 14 ENTER Printer Tests Starts the test All E s 15 ENTER Printer Tests Stops the tes
276. sult Paper Out Dots It is recommended that only a Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer set this parameter Paper Out Dots allows the Customer Service Engineer to specify where the last line on the page will print when there is a paper out condition Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen System Memory This parameter displays the amount of RAM installed Print Statistics You can view various printer statistics such as hours of usage and refer to these figures for preventive maintenance purposes Printer statistics accumulate continuously they do not reset when you turn off the printer All of the printer statistics are set to zero at the factory after burn in testing e On The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on The range is from 0 to 30 000 hours e Print The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing The range is from 0 to 30 000 hours e Print Strokes The cumulative number of back and forth shuttle strokes the printer has printed during normal operation The range is from 0 to 2 147 483 648 shuttle strokes e Print Lines The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed The range is from 0 to 2 147 483 648 print lines e 11 inch Pages The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed The range in print pages is from 0 to 2 147 483 648 total inches of paper movement divided by 11 125 Chapter 4 RibbonMinder RibbonM
277. t You can select one of 92 pre defined character sets by ID although character sets range from 0 109 not all sets are available on the LineJet printer or you can select pitch symbol set and typeface individually If the combination you choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets the ID submenu will reflect that selection If not the ID menu will display xx to indicate that the current character set does not match a pre defined set Set 0 is the default and its attributes are 10 cpi Data Processing typeface and Roman 8 symbol set Secondary Char Set Your printer can store an additional character set To toggle between them send the Shift In Decimal 15 to select the Primary character set or Shift Out Decimal 14 to select the Secondary character set Page Length Rep e Inches Page All page length calculations are based on the inches displayed on the panel e Lines Page All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly The length of the page is the number of lines per inch or Ipi For example if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 Ipi the page is physically 13 67 inches Since 13 67 inches is not selectable from the Length in Inches menu change the representation to lines then set the number of lines to 82 The inches menu will display 13 6 inches although the printer internally keeps the exact form length of 13 67 inches Max Line Width Set the maximum line width at 13 2 inches the default or 13 6 in
278. t All E s 16 a g ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key LOCKED 17 ON LINE ONLINE 18 Examine the print quality The characters should be fully formed and of uniform density If the test does not run or characters appear malformed contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer 19 If the print quality is good set the top of form 256 Printing A Hex Dump Printing A Hex Dump P HEYe yet BO Bi 32 23 24 325 26 27 28 29 GA 2B 2C SD 2E aF O123455789 3 gt 7 BO Bi 32 33 3 35 26 37 38 39 3A 3E 3C 3D 3E JF ABCDEFGHIJKLMNG 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 4B 49 46 4B 40 40D 4E 4F PQ RSTUVWXYZENI _ SO 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 597 SA 58 SC Sh SE SF abedefghijkimno 66 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D SE OF pqrstuvwxyzti 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 20 IP amp C et 0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 BA 2B 2C 2D 2E aF 30 123456789 lt gt 7 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 SA 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 ABCDEFGH 1 amp 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 OD OA 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 0123456 27 28 29 aA 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 789 lt gt 7 ABCDEF 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 GHIJKLMNOPGRSTUV 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 WXYZEN _ abcdef 57 58 57 SA 5B 5C SD SE SF 60 61 62 43 64 65 66 ghijkimnopqrstuy 67 68 69 6A 6B C 6D E F 7O Fi 72 73 74 75 76 wxeyuztik 1 4e 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 20 21 22 23 24 25 R 27 701234567 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2
279. t Display Can you ping the LineJet Print Server from your Windows station If not refer to the section titled LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On The Network Have you used the correct URL for the LineJet Print Server home page It should be http LineJetIPaddress e g http 192 75 11 9 163 Chapter 8 _ Windows Troubleshooting Tips Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer e Can you ping the LineJet Print Server from your Windows NT station If not refer to the LineJet Print Server Card Cannot Be Found On The Network section e Did you specify the correct IP address or host name for the LineJet Print Server in the first field of the Add LPR Compatible Printer box e Did you specify a valid destination queue on the LineJet Print Server in the second field of the Add LPR Compatible Printer dialogue box If so did you also enter it in lowercase letters e LPR is available only on Windows NT not on Windows 95 or 98 unless third party software is added Cannot Browse The LineJet Print Server Card On The Network e Have you looked under the right Windows workgroup By default the LineJet Print Server will be found under WORKGROUP e Are you able to browse other Windows stations and devices on the network from this same station e Has this Windows station been given enough time to update its registry so it can see this newly added workgroup device Sometimes Windows stati
280. t Print Quality 18 to 60 pound 68 to 227 gm meter Multipart Forms Carbon Paper 12 pounds 46 gm meter up to 6 total pages Carbons 8 pounds 30 gm meter2 up to 6 total pages Pack Thickness Maximum 0 025 inch 0 635 mm total Carbonless Up to 4 part forms Terms And Definitions Test the paper first if you plan to use it in environments with humidity of less than 20 or greater than 80 Also test paper that you plan to use at high humidity to ensure satisfactory feeding and handling and test paper to be used at low humidity to determine if static buildup must be eliminated for proper paper stacking Paper Guidelines The terms below describe continuous form paper Terms And Definitions Chaff Cut Point Cut to Tie Ratio Evenness Form Thickness Margin Print Area Print Station Staple Tenting Tie Point Residual bits of paper not completely removed after the punch process that creates tractor pin holes major and minor perforations etc The area along a perforation where a cut has been made that extends through the entire form The ratio of cut points to tie points occurring along a perforation The amount of variation between the thickest and thinnest points measured across the print area i e between the side perforations Thickness measured at the thickest point of the entire form This includes glue lines compressed staples perforations etc and is not limited to the pr
281. t for which you wish to change the poll time This will bring up the printer objects details pages 3 Click on Configuration to display the configuration page 200 Changing The Print Server Name NDS amp Bindery 4 Change the Service Interval to the desired number in seconds Note i You may also want to change the Service mode for forms to Change forms as needed If you do not do this the LineJet Print Server will need to poll the file server twice as much to get all the information it needs 5 Re power the LineJet Print Server by turning the printer off and on to make the changes take effect Netware 3 x 1 Enter PCONSOLE as supervisor on your Novell host Select Print Server Information from the main menu and press ENTER Select the print server you have been using for your PSERVER setup and press ENTER By default this will be M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print server s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device e g M_091C1A Select Print Server Configuration from the menu that displays Select Printer Configuration from the next menu to display a list of configured printers 6 Select the printer for which you wish to alter the poll time and press ENTER 7 Change the Sampling Interval to the desired number in seconds Note You may also want to change the Service mode for forms to Change forms as ne
282. t has more than one tree you may want to set a preferred tree By default the LineJet Print Server will try to log in to each tree it finds until it is successful HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http LineJet IPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 Note i If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and enter the preferred tree in the NDS Preferred Tree field 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re power the printer to make the new settings take effect 205 Chapter 11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration 10 100Base T Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and w press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print Server s IP address followed by a colon then root ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell tree tree 4 Reset the unit to make the changes take effect reset 206 NDS PSERVER Setup Netware 4 x Novell Host Co
283. t is unique 13 When prompted for a test page select either Yes or No depending on the state of the attached printer and click on FINISH Windows may ask for a disk or CD ROM to load the appropriate printer driver to complete this new printer setup There should now be a new printer icon within the Printers folder This new network printer relies on NetBIOS over TCP IP as the underlying protocol to print to the LineJet Print Server Printronix Printing System PPS Host Setup To configure a PPS LPR port for a printer on a Windows station you will need to 1 Insert the CD and locate the PPS file in the Utilities section 2 Double click on the PPS ZIP file to extract all files within it to a directory on the Windows station 3 Once extracted to a directory find the Setup file and double click on this to load the InstallShield Wizard 4 Answer the prompts throughout the wizard and select Yes to restart your computer at the end 160 Windows 3 1 Host Setup 5 Once your computer is rebooted open the Settings Printers folder to view your existing printers Note i PPS will only work with an existing printer Therefore if you do not have an existing printer that you can alter create one now using any port settings you would like These will be changed in the following steps 6 Select the printer that you want to use with PPS and click the right mouse button to bring up a sub menu
284. t message appears on the LCD press the CLEAR key to remove the fault message then replace the ribbon see your Quick Reference Guide If you need to complete a current print job before replacing the ribbon press ON LINE This allows the printer to continue printing for an additional two minutes After the two minute period has elapsed the fault will reoccur if the Ribbon Action parameter remains set on Fault If Ribbon Action is changed to Disable or Display within the two minute period the fault will not recur disable RibbonMinder if you do not want to change the ribbon at this time The fault message will reappear once the function is enabled again and the printer status indicator will flash until the ribbon is changed 127 Chapter 4 _RibbonMinder 128 5 Overview Approaches To Network Printing Configuring your network printing is based on the network protocols and host environments you already use or plan to use It is common to find multiple network protocols co existing in the same network The LineJet Print Server is a multi protocol device that is able to accommodate many protocols at the same time The actual print job order operates on a first in first out basis This means it is possible to configure your LineJet Print Server using any or all of the methods listed in this manual for use at the same time This concept is what creates the ability to use powerful printer management tools in parallel with the act of pr
285. t server objects you will need to complete the following steps 1 Log in to NetWare Administrator as a user with security equal to Admin on your Novell host 2 Click with the right mouse button on a branch in the tree that you would like to create a print queue object in 3 Select Create from the menu that pops up to bring up the New Object dialogue 4 Select Print Queue from the Class of new object list and then click on OK 5 Select Directory Service Queue and type the name of the queue into the Print Queue name field 6 Fill in the Print Queue Volume field by typing in a volume or browsing for one Click on Create when you are done 7 Click with the right mouse button on a branch in the tree that you would like to create a printer object in 8 Select Create from the menu that pops up to bring up the New Object dialogue 9 Select Printer from the Class of new object list and then click on OK 207 Chapter 11 Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T 10 Type in the name for the printer in the Printer name field Note The Printer object name must match one of the destination names on the LineJet Print Server Most likely this will be d1prn In NDS a printer object can only be attached to one print server object at a given time as Novell is using the printer object to represent a physical printer A
286. t the forms width Serial Matrix Emulation Overstrike This option enables you to print bold characters e Enable Turns on bold print When enabled overstrike printing slows down the printer Disable Turns off bold print Define LF Code e LF LLF Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e LF CR LF Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received The next print position is print position 1 of the next line Printer Select e Disable Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes e Enable Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received Alt Set 80 9F e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the Serial Matrix Character Set Menu on page 94 To use one of these sets choose the desired group heading such as European Sets and press ENTER Then choose the desired set within that group such as Roman 8 and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set name will include an asterisk to indicate your selection Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual ESC d command e Even dot plot Interprets the ESC
287. ta Carrier Detect DCD Status signal to the printer The ON condition is required for the printer to receive data Data Terminal Ready DTR Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration RS 422 RD RD Serial data stream differentially received by printer TD TD Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selection Note RD and TD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interface Protocol X ON X OFF The printer transmits an X ON character hex 11 when entering the Online mode or when the buffer is almost empty The printer transmits an X OFF character hex 13 when entering the Offline mode or when the buffer is almost full 249 Chapter 14 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interface Error Handling Note All serial errors are treated as faults that require operator intervention 250 Parity Error Handling Parity error checking is a configuration option selected from the operator panel With odd or even parity checking selected a character with a parity error is replaced with a question mark character When parity checking is not selected NONE on the operator panel parity errors are ignored and the characters are printed as received Framing Error Handling Framing error checking is always in effect for the seri
288. the LineJet Print Server card on the network 2 Configuring the LineJet Print Server with its mandatory print setup settings 3 Configuring a new print queue on the file server See Chapter 11 Novell Configuration For 10 100Base T Interfaces for information about additional options available with the 10 100 Base T interface 183 Chapter 10 Novell Environment Description Novell Environment Description The LineJet Print Server card supports network printing under Novell environments by using IPX It supports all 3 1X versions of NetWare Figure 15 provides a Novell setup overview Version 4 1X is supported under bindery emulation only NetWare Workstation NetWare 4 1 File ee a NetWare 4 1 a NetWare File Server Workstation NetWare Workstation Bridge Router NetWare Workstation Figure 15 Novell Integration Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration 184 Mandatory Under all Novell environments the LineJet Print Server card does not require any network settings to make it visible on the network Simply plug it in to your network and power it on However with a new print queue setup on a Novell file server there can be some mandatory settings needed on the LineJet Print Server Using HTML Forms Optional Additional se
289. the desired character set and press ENTER The desired set will be marked with an asterisk to indicate your selection Alt Char Set This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character e Set 1 Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Set 2 Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03 04 05 06 15 and 80 through 9F 20 CPI Condensed Condensed print characters are narrower than the normal character set This is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page e Enable Prints characters about 60 percent the width of normal characters when condensed print is chosen by the host computer e Disable Does not condense print widths even if condensed print is chosen by the host Epson FX Emulation Epson FX Emulation Printer Protocol from page 80 Epson FX Factory Default Define CR Code Auto LF Define LF Code Printer Select Character Set 20 CPI Condensed Alt Set 80 9F CR CR Enable CR CR LF Disable LF LF LF CR LF Disable Enable Epson Set ASCII USA Enable Disable Control Code Printable French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am F
290. the one you defined in step 6 Then press ENTER Select a priority and press ENTER Priority 1 should be sufficient Press ESCAPE until you are back to Main Menu Reboot the Print Server by repowering the printer Check the Currently Attached Servers and verify the print server is active Press ESCAPE until you are out of the PCONSOLE Even though the entire print set up is done through PCONSOLE you may want to communicate directly with the print server in order to modify settings monitor the unit etc To communicate with the print server the optional host software npsh exe may be used npsh exe is a DOS executable program that can be run from a DOS prompt on a NetWare workstation npsh exe performs the following npsh nvplist Lists all of the LineJet Print Server devices on the network each name is in the default format M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the unit Ethernet address This is regardless of whether it is configured as a PSERVER or an RPRINTER npsh unitname Starts a Telnet like session with the named print server allowing you to configure monitor and troubleshoot the unit with the built in command set npsh unitname command Initiates a single Command with guest access only to the unit instead of entering into a complete session NetWare Version 4 x RPRINTER Setup To communicate with the unit using npsh exe a From a DOS prompt on a Novell workstation begin an npsh sessi
291. the printer has reset itself the LCD momentarily goes blank the printer will put itself in ONLINE mode 35 Chapter 2 _ Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer 15 If you had to install a data cable to the computer and printer in step 5 disconnect it from the computer and printer 16 Using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 reconfigure the printer Be sure to designate the correct Power up configuration see Chapter 4 The Configuration Menus for more information 17 Power the printer off then on to verify that the correct saved configuration loads on power up 18 Reconnect the printer data cable s and have the customer send a file to the printer to verify the host connection and configuration Loading Code Through The Ethernet Port Using ftp You can download function code from a networked PC or file server to the printer s flash memory using the LineJet Print Server the internal network card port You must use this method to update the firmware on the LineJet Print Server The IP address of the printer will be used to download the function code 1 Installing new function code erases all saved printer configurations Make a printout of a saved configurations You will use the printouts to restore printer configuration Set the printer power switch to O off On the printer control panel press and hold down the ON LINE FF keys Without releasing the keys power the printer o
292. the w key while the test is running A value between 1 and 2000 displays To change the value the CSE presses the gt or 4 key until the desired value displays and then presses ENTER Note tay The printer must be printing the phase pattern of H s when the Phasing Value is changed or the new phasing value will not be written into non volatile RAM NVRAM If the value is changed when not printing the printer will return to its default phasing value when powered off and then back on 124 e Paperout Adj It is recommended that only a Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer run this test The Paperout Adj allows the Customer Service Engineer to specify where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out condition Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen See the LineJet Printers Maintenance Manual for more information Burnin Test Running this test is not recommended e Print Error Log Prints a log of the last 50 errors that have occurred in the printer e Clear Error Log Clears the error log e E Net Test Page Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet adapter if present Diagnostics Test Width This parameter permits you to run the self tests at full width or 80 columns Caution This parameter must match paper width used If full width is selected for use with 80 column or 8 5 inch wide paper damage to the hammer tips and platen may re
293. ther than by directing any host running any protocol to the networked printer resource Computers designated as print job servers have large hard disk space to store print data and spool management software All clients direct their print job to the computer designated as the print job server rather than the printer therefore the client to print job server network protocol used might not be the same as the print job server to LineJet Print Server Large network environments today are generally TCP IP or Novell network protocols or a mixture of the two Common examples of larger networks utilizing the LineJet Printer and Print Server e Many Windows 95 98 clients directing print jobs to an NT server The Windows 95 98 clients NT server and LineJet printer might or might not be in the same physical location building or even country The LineJet printer is located based on where its output is needed not where the jobs originate Remote printer management tools LineJet Printer Manager SNMP etc give the same ability to the administrator today that networking provided in the past Windows 95 98 NT Novell network client computers direct output to a Unix machine designated as the print job server which spools and manages print jobs The designated print server could be an HP e3000 IBM AS 400 Unix or Linux or Novell machine 6 TCP IP Configuration TCP IP LineJet Print Server Configuration This configuration procedure assume
294. ther with its corresponding two digit hexadecimal code Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception problems Figure 20 on page 257 shows a hex dump sample Power up State This parameter allows you to configure the printer to power up in the offline or online state Online is the default Display Language This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the message display English Italian French German or Spanish Power Stacker This parameter which is only presented with the LineJet 1500Q model allows you to enable the default or disable power stacker operation 109 Chapter 4 _ Host Interface Menu Host Interface Menu HOST INTERFACE Bi Tronics Centronics Serial Ethernet Auto Switching see page 111 seepage 112 seepage 114 seepage 117 see page 118 The Host Interface Menu Diagram enables you to select and configure an interface between the printer and your host computer e Bi Tronics factory default e Serial e Centronics e Ethernet e Auto Switching Note The printer will not work online unless the type of interface selected from l the HOST INTERFACE menu matches the type of interface in your host K computer The interface in your host computer is the one that connects to the data cable of the printer For example if the interface in your computer is a serial interface then the serial interfac
295. this example with a valid one of your own Example using AIX On a command prompt enter arp s ether 192 168 20 20 00 80 72 09 00 5F set the static arp value be certain to replace the IP Address of this example with a valid one of your own 135 Chapter 6 _ TCP IP LineJet Print Server Configuration Note Windows uses hyphens to separate the values in the MAC address Unix u and others use colons Now power the printer up and wait a minute or more for the LineJet Print Server to obtain the address above Test by issuing the command ping IP_address If you do not get a positive ping response check your arp table entry and check that the printer is on the same wire as you the same IP address range different only in the value after the last period Verify that you have not typed an IP address that you or someone else is already using If you have type the command arp d IP_address ata DOS prompt to delete the incorrect entry and then type the correct value If you do get a positive ping response remove the static arp entry to avoid conflict by using either telnet or a web browser At a DOS prompt type the command arp d 192 168 20 20 with your own IP Address value in place of this one Then store this value into the LineJet Print Server Telnet Using a DOS window or a third party tool capable of a telnet session use the following telnet xxx xxx xxx xxx Or hosts_table_name login root default
296. thod 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 203 Chapter 11 Novell LineJet Print Server Configuration 10 100Base T 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http LineJetIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and u press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and go to the Service Type field to select the appropriate mode 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re power the printer to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and u press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print Server s IP address followed by a colon then root ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell mode nds bindery auto 4 Reset the unit to make the changes take effect reset Setting The LineJet Print Server Context NDS The LineJet Print Server allows you to store the print server object in any context within the NDS tree you choose By default the LineJet Print Server will look for
297. tility the PPM Port number and PPM Port Timeout settings must match the settings in the LineJet Printer Manager program Printer Control Printer Control Menu The Printer Control Menu allows you to choose the printer s behavior Options on this menu as shown below are described in the following pages PRINTER CONTROL Unidirectional PMD Fault Open Platen Slow Paper Power Saver BOF Slew Time Disable Enable Disable Disable 15 mins Enable Disable Enable Enable 5 sec 60 min Disable Instant To view options press Down gt Next 4 Prev To select an option press ENTER To return to main menu press CLEAR To exit menu press ON LINE Default Setting Printer Control Unidirectional The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed By setting this feature you can configure the printer to print in both directions of the shuttle sweep bidirectional or to print in one direction only unidirectional You might want to enable this feature when printing bar codes high quality text and graphics or other printing that requires precise vertical alignment Although enabling this feature reduces print speed it enhances the vertical alignment of dots and produces cleaner sharper bar codes and text Choices include the following e Disable The default The printer will print all data in both directions of the shut
298. tle sweep bidirectional printing This choice produces higher printing speed 121 Chapter 4 Printer Control Menu e Enable The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle sweep unidirectional printing This choice produces higher print quality PMD Paper Motion Detection Fault e Enable If a paper jam occurs an audible alarm beeps the LCD displays the message CLEAR PAPER JAM and the printer stops printing Disable You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it Caution Once PMD is disabled paper motion is not monitored If a paper jam occurs the printer ignores the condition and continues to print which can cause severe damage to the printer 122 Slow Paper Slew This parameter affects the speed at which paper advances into the stacking area of the printer The speed may be slowed down by enabling this feature e Disable The default The printer will slew and stack paper at maximum speed e Enable Causes the paper to stack at a slower pace This ensures that certain forms will stack more neatly Power Saver Time Power Saver is also referred to as the ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program The Power Saver feature places the printer in sleep mode when the printer has not been used for a specified number of minutes In sleep mode the printer is in low energy idle state all fans and higher voltages are off and only 5Vdc logical circuits are active
299. to make the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra digits or adding zeros to the end of bar code data to meet minimum data length requirements for some bar codes Not all errors will be corrected Ignore DB8 Setup Following are several options which define character filtering and data bit 8 Ignore Nulls e Disable None of the null characters hex 00 or 80 are ignored e Enable Null characters are filtered out of the data stream Data Bit 8 e Enable The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer all 8 bits are used for data bits and characters in the hex 80 FF range can be accessed Disable When the host PI line is enabled data bit 8 internally indicates PI line status To use the PI line disable data bit 8 and enable the Host PI configuration option under the PI Control option below Note Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or the PI signal but never both When enabled as data bit 8 data bit 8 has priority over the PI signal and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret PI line data Conversely when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used data bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function and you cannot access characters in the hex 80 FF range Therefore to access characters in the hex 80 FF range data bit 8 must be enabled 107 Chapter 4 _ Emulation Menu ISO Char Set This parameter allows you to
300. tout e Symbol set printout 24 Graphics Options Graphics Options The PGL and QMS emulations allow you to create and store forms generate logos bar codes and expanded characters and create other graphics Alphanumerics and bar code data are added as the form is printed These emulations are available as a customer installed option For more information contact your authorized Hewlett Packard representative Protocols And Emulations A protocol is a set of rules governing the exchange of information between the printer and its host computer These rules consist of codes which manipulate and print data and allow for machine to machine communication A printer and its host computer must use the same protocol Most impact printers use single ASCII character codes to print text numbers and punctuation marks Some characters both singularly and in groups of two or more are defined as control codes Control codes instruct the printer to perform specific functions such as underlining text printing subscripts setting page margins etc The main difference between most printer protocols is in the characters used to create control codes and the ways in which these characters are formatted When the printer executes the character and control codes of a particular printer protocol it is emulating that printer For example if the printer uses the Proprinter III XL protocol it is emulating an IBM Proprinter III XL printer i
301. tp LineJetIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and remove the name of the preferred file server from the File Server field 4 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re power the print server to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress Note i If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 198 2 You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print Server s IP address followed by a colon then root ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell fserver del fservername where fservername is the name of the Novell file server you want to remove as a preferred file server 4 Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect reset Setting Password Security NDS amp Bindery Setting Password Security NDS amp Bindery In addition to the general security measures a Novell setup provides further password security A password can be set on the LineJet Print Server and within your PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator setup so that when the LineJet Print
302. trademarks or registered trademarks of NetManage Inc Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks and the Netscape Communications logo is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc Solaris is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc Ultrix is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Unix is a registered trademark of X Open Company Limited This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifont technology Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division Miles Incorporated Agfa CG Garth Graphic Intellifont and Type Director are registered trademarks and Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division Miles Incorporated Agfa CG Bodoni CG Century Schoolbook CG Goudy Old Style CG Melliza Microstyle CG Omega and CG Palacio are products of Agfa Corporation CG Times based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and or its subsidiaries Letraset is a registered trademark and Aachen Revue and University Roman are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation Futura is a registered trademark of Fundici n Tipografica Neufville S A ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Benguiat ITC Bookman ITC Century ITC Cheltenham ITC Clearface ITC Galliard
303. ttings are available to fine tune the LineJet Print Server s Novell functionality These options include e NDS Context The NDS context in which the print server object was created This option is required if you create the print server object in a different context from the context the file server object for the file server that you logged in with is on e NDS Tree The NDS tree the print server object was created in This is only needed if your environment uses more than one NDS tree e Mode The mode the LineJet Print Server will run in This can be either auto bindery or NDS The default is auto so that the LineJet Print Server can autosense which mode it should run in See NetWare Version 4 x RPRINTER Setup on page 191 for information on what to do when using both bindery and NDS file servers at the same time e Preferred File Server In a bindery setup this specifies the file server that the print server object was created on In an NDS setup this specifies a file server s that the print server object resides on Since NDS is distributed most administrators will not know which file server s the print server object is actually stored on so in most NDS environments this option is not used See Chapter 11 Novell Configuration For 10 100Base T Interfaces for additional information about these options Using HTML Forms When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server a new print server must be defined to repr
304. uctions Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents Power back on the printer If this message recurs contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ILL EXT BUS ACC Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ILL INST ACCSS Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer ILLGL OPR ACCSS Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer INTAKE FAN FAULT Sensors cannot detect current in fan circuit See description for HMR BANK FAN FLT LO DRV SHORT Circuit s on the hammer bank or in the hammer bank power cable shorted to ground Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer LOAD PAPER Printer is out of paper Load paper See Quick Reference Guide LOADING PROGRAM The new program is loading into None FROM PORT XX printer RAM XX indicates how much of the program has loaded LOADING PROGRAM The printer has deleted the None INTO FLASH previous program from flash memory and is loading the new program into flash memory PAP BAD TABLE Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer PAP BSY TOO LNG Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer P
305. ulations e Epson FX This LP Plus emulation is provided for compatibility with the Epson FX 1050 printer control language e Proprinter XL This LP Plus emulation is provided for compatibility with the IBM Proprinter III XL printer control language e P Series This is the Printronix P Series printer control language provided as part of LP Plus Optional Emulations IGP VGL Code V and IGP PGL are optional graphics emulations They can be selected and configured only if you have purchased these options PCL II must be the active emulation for Code V or IGP PGL to operate PCL II Emulation PCL II Emulation Factory Default EMULATION from page 74 PCL II Primary Secondary Page Length Max Line Face CPI Char Set Char Set Rep Width Delay ID ID Inches Page 13 2 inches Enable 0 109 xx 0 109 xx Lines Page 13 6 inches Disable Symbol Set Symbol Set see next page see next page Pitch Pitch 10 12 13 3 10 12 13 3 15 16 67 20 15 16 67 20 Density Density Data Processing Data Processing NLQ NLQ OCR A OCR A OCR B OCR B High Speed High Speed Graphics Perforation Display Line PTX Linefeed LPI Adjust Density Skip Functns Terminator 60 dpi Disable Disable LF After CR Disable 6 Ipi 70 dpi Enable Enable Disable
306. up The printer may be told to do a linefeed but the Unix job does not specify anything about a carriage return to follow this To fix this carriage return insertion must be enabled somewhere in the print setup The easiest and most common location is on the LineJet Print Server itself within the appropriate model The feature is called onler and the command syntax is set model modelname stty onlcr save For example if printing to the destination diprn the associated model is m1 Therefore the command is set model m1 stty onlcr save No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out Unix text jobs may also have problems outputting the last page of a job especially when the BSD Remote LPD print method is used This means the form feed button has to be pressed on the printer to get this last page out To make this process automatic tell the LineJet Print Server to handle this task by setting this feature on in the appropriate model The command syntax is set model modelname trailer SFF save For example if printing to the destination d2prn the associated model is m2 Therefore the command is set model m2 trailer SFF save For default destination model mappings of the LineJet Print Server please see LineJet Print Server Naming Schemes on page 240 181 Chapter 9 _ Unix Troubleshooting Tips 182 10 Novell Configuration Overview This chapter details a complete Novell setup including 1 Identifying
307. ure If you decide not to print the configuration then continue with the following steps 10 A g ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key LOCKED 11 ON LINE ONLINE 12 Close the printer cover The printer is ready for operation 51 Chapter 3 _ Changing Parameters Printing The Current Configuration Factory Default CONFIG CONTROL Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config Power Up Protect Config Configs Current Factory Power Up All 1 OAONoOaRWD The configuration printout lists the stored parameters You can print any or all of the configurations shown above Configurations 1 8 are the customized configurations To print a configuration follow the procedure in Table 7 Note It is recommended that you print all of the configurations and store them in l a safe place such as inside the printer cabinet for future reference 52 Printing The Current Configuration Table 7 Printing Configurations Step Key Result Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on Raise the printer cover on cabinet models 2 ON LINE OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 3 a p g ENTER SWITCH PE you to make configuration UNLOCKED caangss OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL 4 CONFIG CONTROL N Load Config S PS om CONFIG CONTROL
308. ure is required if the host computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer e LF LLF Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed e LF CR LF Adds an extra Carriage Return with each Line Feed Printer Select e Disable Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes e Enable Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received Character Set This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation as shown in the Character Set menu Note that when OCR A or OCR B is selected as the print language the Font Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus menu page 80 is changed to OCR A or OCR B respectively Epson FX Emulation 20 CPI Condensed Condensed print characters are narrower than the normal character set This is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page e Enable Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when condensed print is chosen by the host computer For example a 12 CPI Draft font will condense to 20 CPI e Disable Does not condense print widths even if condensed print is chosen by the host Alt Set 80 9F e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F 91 Chapter 4 92 Emulation Menu Serial Matrix Emulation
309. ve never had a hosts file you can create one by using Notepad or any other text editor and saving it to the Windows directory Edit the file to add your new LineJet Printer and save the file Rebooting is not necessary Location of hosts file Windows 95 98windows NTwindows system32 drivers etc Unix etc HP e3000host net sys Example of entries in a hosts file 10 200 30 123 printer1 10 200 30 130 accounting 192 168 2 33 next_state 10 200 30 18 MIS Note Make the names easy to remember but descriptively useful In most Unix systems using DNS a hosts table is constructed as shown above The file nsswitch conf or its equivalent is then edited to associate a MAC hardware address to an IP address in the hosts file In doing this any individual client workstation needs only a single address entry specifically the DNS host address as a ping to printer1 is actually resolved by the DNS machine and returned to the client workstation This means an administrator need maintain only one hosts file for all to use making updating central For peer to peer and small networks using a local hosts table on each workstation can function in place of DNS 132 Methods For Setting TCP IP Values Methods For Setting TCP IP Values Methods available to set TCP IP values vary based the operating environment see Table 11 Table 11 Available TCP IP Setup Methods Operating Environment arp bootp DHCP Unix HP e30
310. ver folder containing the NT driver Click on OK Add Printer Wizard HP LineJet Click on the HP LineJet in the Printers box then click Next 157 Chapter 8 _ Windows Host Configuration Add Printer Wizard Ed Type in the name of this printer When you have finished click Next Note Exceeding 31 characters in the Server and Printer name combination may not be supported by some applications Printer name Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer C Yes No 10 In the Printer name box enter a name for this printer Click Next Add Printer Wizard x Indicate whether this printer will be shared with other network users If you choose sharing give this printer a share name Shared C Not shared Share Name HPLineJet Select the operating systems of all computers that will be printing to this printer Windows 95 Windows NT 4 0 MIPS Windows NT 4 0 Alpha Windows NT 4 0 PPC Windows NT 3 5 or 3 51 x86 Windows NT 3 5 or 3 51 MIPS lt Back Cancel 11 Determine if the printer is shared with other network users If it is shared the share name and the operating system must be selected 158 Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup Add Printer Wizard _ D N 12 Print a Windows test page 13 If there are any problems during or after installation see Windows NT 4 0 H
311. vicing store pserver smb workgrp newworkgroupname store pserver smb workgrp eng Define a different Windows workgroup as defined by newworkgroupname for the LineJet Print Server to be visible within By default the print server only comes up within the group called WORKGROUP store pserver from default Set all general print server settings back to factory defaults store pserver from current Store all current general print server settings to flash memory so they are retained after a power cycle This ensures all current settings match what is stored in flash memory store rprinter add del printservername printernumber destination store rprinter add pserverl 0 diprn Add or delete the RPRINTER settings on the LineJet Print Server for a Novell environment The printservername must be the name of an existing PSERVER NLM on your Novell file server The printernumber is the printer number within this PSERVER NLM The destination is the queue on the LineJet Print Server where the print jobs will be sent to 221 Chapter 12 Complete Command List 222 store tcpip ifnum addr IPaddress store tcpip 1 addr 192 75 11 9 Store the IP address for the LineJet Print Server store tcpip ifnum mask netmask store tcpip 1 mask 255 255 255 0 Store the subnet mask for the LineJet Print Server store tcpip ifnum opts rarp bootp dhcp store tcpip 1 opts rarp bootp dhcp Enable or disable the automatic RARP BOOTP or DHCP re
312. w The printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs into the printer The interface processes all communications signals and data to and from the host computer It consists of a printed circuit board assembly PCBA and a connector for the data cable from the host computer Communication signals and data may be sent over Ethernet parallel or serial lines When data is sent through multiple interfaces the Autoport Switching feature forces the printer to automatically switch between the serial and parallel port and between the Ethernet adapter and the serial port when the LineJet Print Server is installed This chapter describes the following interfaces provided with the printer e Centronics e Bi Tronics e RS 232 serial e RS 422 serial Note If you require a parallel interface contact your Hewlett Packard Customer u Service Engineer 241 Chapter 14 Centronics Parallel Interface Centronics Parallel Interface The Centronics interface enables the printer to operate with controllers designed for buffered Centronics printers The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 15 feet 5 meters Table 15 Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin DATA LINE 1 2 ACKNOWLEDGE 10 CHASSIS GROUND 17 Return 20 Return 28 DATA LINE 2 3 ONLINE 13 GROUND 30 Return
313. when the prime signal is asserted from the host This setting is used only if the Prime Signal parameter is enabled Do Nothing No form feed is performed on reset Buffer Size in K Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port buffer The default is 1 Kbyte but you can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments 113 Chapter 4 Host Interface Menu Serial Submenu Note The serial parameters in the printer must be set the same as the interface in the host computer at the other end of the data cable of the printer Otherwise the printer might not work online and data characters from the computer might not print or might print as garbled text 114 Serial from page 110 Factory Default Interface Data Baud Rate Word Stop Bits Type Protocol Length RS 232 XON XOFF 9600 8 1 RS 422 ETX ACK 19200 7 2 ACK NAK 38400 DTR 600 1200 2400 4800 Parity Data Term Request to Buffer Size in Ready Send K None True On Line and BNF 1 Odd On Line and BNF Off Line or BF 1 16 Even Off Line or BF False Mark False True Sense The serial submenu allows you to choose the configuration of the Serial host interface type as shown above Several other serial parameters are included on this menu as described below Interface Type Allows you t
314. width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width Overstrike This option enables you to print bold characters e Enable Turns on bold print When enabled overstrike printing slows down the printer Disable Turns off bold print Define LF Code e LF CR LF Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command The next print position is print position 1 of the next line e LF LF Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next line Select SFCC This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the Special Function Control Code SFCC command delimiter P Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F Options include the following e ESC hex 1B e SOH hex 01 85 Chapter 4 Emulation Menu e ETX hex 03 e CIRCUMFLEX hex 5E also called caret e TILDE hex 7E Note i SOH ETX and ESC are non printables The characters and are printable However do not use them as printables in the host data stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will occur 86 EVFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting e Enable Enables the VFU and selects P Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU e Disable Disables VFU processing Alt Set 80 9F Determines whether the pr
315. will see with the LineJet Print Server The ideal configuration is a network printer defined on the NT server to be shared by Windows 95 clients However any Windows station can also go directly to the LineJet Print Server 149 Chapter 8 _ Windows LineJet Print Server Configuration NT Server e E IP Router Figure 10 Windows Integration Windows LineJet Print Server Configuration 150 The IP address and subnet mask are mandatory TCP IP settings and are needed before the print server can be detected on the network There are also additional optional settings This section offers alternative methods for configuring your LineJet Print Server in a Windows environment and mentions some of the more common optional settings available Mandatory Since TCP IP is used for Windows printing the LineJet Print Server must be configured with a minimum of an IP address and subnet mask before it can be seen on the network Optional Additional settings like routing entries can be configured This allows communication across subnets when no other router exists Configuration of the LineJet Print Server can be done from the printer control panel Web browser or host commands Communicating Across Routers Communicating Across Routers Since Windows env
316. wing each step carefully Note i Be sure to reboot the printer before beginning a new setup and after completing an RPRINTER setup Wait at least a minute for the Print Server to login and attach to a queue 215 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T 216 Printing Related The job goes to the queue but nothing prints If nothing is printing make sure you have a connection to the LineJet Print Server first See the PSERVER or RPRINTER sections above if you are having connection related problems Otherwise consider these points when trying to solve printing problems in a Novell environment e Does the job leave the queue or is it stuck there indefinitely If it leaves properly the problem points to the actual printing mechanism on your Novell system e g CAPTURE NPRINT etc to the print job format or to the printer itself Otherwise review the configuration steps you have already followed e Have you confirmed that you can print from the LineJet Print Server to the printer ignoring the Novell setup altogether Please see start fox tts loopb prn on page 233 for a good test e Is anything happening on the printer when the print job is sent Sometimes the print job may have arrived at the printer but can be waiting for a manual form feed If this is the case please see Set Commands on page 223 for information on trailer strings e Is the printing mechanism you are using e g CAPTURE NPRINT etc
317. xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the Ethernet address This is the default format of the unit s name when it is acting as a PSERVER Note i This M_xxxxxx name must have six digits after the pad out each byte with a zero 0 SO if necessary 212 Has the LineJet Print Server s name been changed from its default of M_xxxxxx and if so have you incorporated this new name into your PSERVER setup Is there a password set for the Print Server to utilize when it is logging in to the file server Make sure the LineJet Print Servers PSERVER password matches that of the PSERVER setup or set both places to no password PSERVER Setup When setting the LineJet Print Server up as a PSERVER did you specify a destination on the LineJet Print Server e g d1prn for the printer name and did you remember this name is case sensitive Note LineJet Print Server destinations are case sensitive so they will not be recognized if they are typed incorrectly By default they are all in lowercase If you are setting up in a NetWare 4 x environment the destination must be renamed to uppercase to match the PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator entry Please see set dest destination name newname on page 223 for information on changing names Does the destination you used in your PSERVER setup have the Novell service enabled See Chapter 12 Commands for information on enabling disabling services
318. y with window cleaning solution Dry the lower cabinet interior by wiping it with a clean lint free cloth For models with a power paper stacker Wipe all power stacker components using a soft cloth lightly moistened with anhydrous alcohol no water to remove dust Reinstall the ribbon and load paper Refer to the LineJet Printers Quick Reference Guide Interior Cleaning Ribbon Spool Ribbon Mask Paper Support hidd Locking Tractor Latch A Base Casting Hammer Forms Thickness Bank L a ever hidden Hammer Bank Shuttle Cover Assembly Cover Ribbon Guide 2 Figure 18 Cleaning the Print Mechanism Cabinet Models 253 Chapter 15 Routine Service Printer Cover Splined Shaft Ribbon Mask N Ribbon Hub Thickness Lever Locking Latch Ribbon Guide 2 Figure 19 Cleaning the Print Mechanism Pedestal Models 254 Printer Self Tests Diagnosing Problems This section is designed to help you recover from any problems which may arise with normal printer operation Printer Self Tests The printer self tests are used to check the print quality and operation of your printer Your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer will typically run these tests For a description of each test see page 123 To activate a test select it and press the ENTER key To stop the test press ENTER again Note Whenever you run a self test the top of form setting is lo
319. you would like to have serviced 8 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re power the printer to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Load aPSERVER on your Netware 3 x or Netware 4 x file server i e issue aload pserver pservername command on the file server Note If itis an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4 x file server you must specify the w pserver name and context for pservername For example load pserver sales_ps sales hp 2 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress Note If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and u press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 You should now see a prompt displayed that has the LineJet Print Server s IP address followed by a colon then root ipaddress root gt 4 At the prompt store the RPRINTER settings on the LineJet Print Server The pservername refers to the existing PSERVER NLM on the file server created in step 1 Syntax store rprinter add pservername printernumber LineJetdestination Example for an RPRINTER servicing printer 0 of the PSERVER NLM called pserver1 and sending jobs to the LineJet Print Server destination diprn store rprinter add pserverl 0 diprn Note If itis an NDS pserver only enter the PSERVER name and not the context u e g sales_ps 211 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T 5 Physically r
320. your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer RIB INVLD STATE Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer RIBBON DRIVE CMX controller does not detect ribbon drive motor Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON RibbonMinder software has determined that the ribbon is out of ink Install a new ribbon and set ribbon life to 100 SECURITY CODE VIOLATION Security code of PAL on controller board does not match code of firmware on the controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED The security PAL is missing or has failed Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR The printer is loading the engine controller program into the engine controller None SHUTL INV CMD Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer SHUTL INV PARM Fatal firmware error on controller board Contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer SHUTTLE JAM No shuttle movement or shuttle is moving at the wrong speed Check for obstruction to shuttle a twisted ribbon or forms thickness lever closed too tightly If fault source is not apparent contact your Hewlett Packard Customer Service Engineer SOFTWARE

HP LQH-HW 3ULQWHUV User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents